PRU GAS Port
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / gas / doc / as.texinfo
... / ...
CommitLineData
1\input texinfo @c -*-Texinfo-*-
2@c Copyright (C) 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
3@c UPDATE!! On future updates--
4@c (1) check for new machine-dep cmdline options in
5@c md_parse_option definitions in config/tc-*.c
6@c (2) for platform-specific directives, examine md_pseudo_op
7@c in config/tc-*.c
8@c (3) for object-format specific directives, examine obj_pseudo_op
9@c in config/obj-*.c
10@c (4) portable directives in potable[] in read.c
11@c %**start of header
12@setfilename as.info
13@c ---config---
14@macro gcctabopt{body}
15@code{\body\}
16@end macro
17@c defaults, config file may override:
18@set have-stabs
19@c ---
20@c man begin NAME
21@c ---
22@include asconfig.texi
23@include bfdver.texi
24@c ---
25@c man end
26@c ---
27@c common OR combinations of conditions
28@ifset COFF
29@set COFF-ELF
30@end ifset
31@ifset ELF
32@set COFF-ELF
33@end ifset
34@ifset AOUT
35@set aout-bout
36@end ifset
37@ifset ARM/Thumb
38@set ARM
39@end ifset
40@ifset Blackfin
41@set Blackfin
42@end ifset
43@ifset BOUT
44@set aout-bout
45@end ifset
46@ifset H8/300
47@set H8
48@end ifset
49@ifset SH
50@set H8
51@end ifset
52@ifset HPPA
53@set abnormal-separator
54@end ifset
55@c ------------
56@ifset GENERIC
57@settitle Using @value{AS}
58@end ifset
59@ifclear GENERIC
60@settitle Using @value{AS} (@value{TARGET})
61@end ifclear
62@setchapternewpage odd
63@c %**end of header
64
65@c @smallbook
66@c @set SMALL
67@c WARE! Some of the machine-dependent sections contain tables of machine
68@c instructions. Except in multi-column format, these tables look silly.
69@c Unfortunately, Texinfo doesn't have a general-purpose multi-col format, so
70@c the multi-col format is faked within @example sections.
71@c
72@c Again unfortunately, the natural size that fits on a page, for these tables,
73@c is different depending on whether or not smallbook is turned on.
74@c This matters, because of order: text flow switches columns at each page
75@c break.
76@c
77@c The format faked in this source works reasonably well for smallbook,
78@c not well for the default large-page format. This manual expects that if you
79@c turn on @smallbook, you will also uncomment the "@set SMALL" to enable the
80@c tables in question. You can turn on one without the other at your
81@c discretion, of course.
82@ifinfo
83@set SMALL
84@c the insn tables look just as silly in info files regardless of smallbook,
85@c might as well show 'em anyways.
86@end ifinfo
87
88@ifnottex
89@dircategory Software development
90@direntry
91* As: (as). The GNU assembler.
92* Gas: (as). The GNU assembler.
93@end direntry
94@end ifnottex
95
96@finalout
97@syncodeindex ky cp
98
99@copying
100This file documents the GNU Assembler "@value{AS}".
101
102@c man begin COPYRIGHT
103Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
104
105Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
106under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
107or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
108with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
109Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
110section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
111
112@c man end
113@end copying
114
115@titlepage
116@title Using @value{AS}
117@subtitle The @sc{gnu} Assembler
118@ifclear GENERIC
119@subtitle for the @value{TARGET} family
120@end ifclear
121@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
122@sp 1
123@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
124@end ifset
125@sp 1
126@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
127@sp 1
128@sp 13
129The Free Software Foundation Inc.@: thanks The Nice Computer
130Company of Australia for loaning Dean Elsner to write the
131first (Vax) version of @command{as} for Project @sc{gnu}.
132The proprietors, management and staff of TNCCA thank FSF for
133distracting the boss while they got some work
134done.
135@sp 3
136@author Dean Elsner, Jay Fenlason & friends
137@page
138@tex
139{\parskip=0pt
140\hfill {\it Using {\tt @value{AS}}}\par
141\hfill Edited by Cygnus Support\par
142}
143%"boxit" macro for figures:
144%Modified from Knuth's ``boxit'' macro from TeXbook (answer to exercise 21.3)
145\gdef\boxit#1#2{\vbox{\hrule\hbox{\vrule\kern3pt
146 \vbox{\parindent=0pt\parskip=0pt\hsize=#1\kern3pt\strut\hfil
147#2\hfil\strut\kern3pt}\kern3pt\vrule}\hrule}}%box with visible outline
148\gdef\ibox#1#2{\hbox to #1{#2\hfil}\kern8pt}% invisible box
149@end tex
150
151@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
152Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
153
154 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
155 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
156 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
157 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
158 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
159 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
160
161@end titlepage
162@contents
163
164@ifnottex
165@node Top
166@top Using @value{AS}
167
168This file is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}
169@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
170@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
171@end ifset
172version @value{VERSION}.
173@ifclear GENERIC
174This version of the file describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
175code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
176@end ifclear
177
178This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
179Documentation License. A copy of the license is included in the
180section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
181
182@menu
183* Overview:: Overview
184* Invoking:: Command-Line Options
185* Syntax:: Syntax
186* Sections:: Sections and Relocation
187* Symbols:: Symbols
188* Expressions:: Expressions
189* Pseudo Ops:: Assembler Directives
190@ifset ELF
191* Object Attributes:: Object Attributes
192@end ifset
193* Machine Dependencies:: Machine Dependent Features
194* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
195* Acknowledgements:: Who Did What
196* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
197* AS Index:: AS Index
198@end menu
199@end ifnottex
200
201@node Overview
202@chapter Overview
203@iftex
204This manual is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}.
205@ifclear GENERIC
206This version of the manual describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
207code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
208@end ifclear
209@end iftex
210
211@cindex invocation summary
212@cindex option summary
213@cindex summary of options
214Here is a brief summary of how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}. For details,
215see @ref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}.
216
217@c man title AS the portable GNU assembler.
218
219@ignore
220@c man begin SEEALSO
221gcc(1), ld(1), and the Info entries for @file{binutils} and @file{ld}.
222@c man end
223@end ignore
224
225@c We don't use deffn and friends for the following because they seem
226@c to be limited to one line for the header.
227@smallexample
228@c man begin SYNOPSIS
229@value{AS} [@b{-a}[@b{cdghlns}][=@var{file}]] [@b{--alternate}] [@b{-D}]
230 [@b{--compress-debug-sections}] [@b{--nocompress-debug-sections}]
231 [@b{--debug-prefix-map} @var{old}=@var{new}]
232 [@b{--defsym} @var{sym}=@var{val}] [@b{-f}] [@b{-g}] [@b{--gstabs}]
233 [@b{--gstabs+}] [@b{--gdwarf-2}] [@b{--gdwarf-sections}]
234 [@b{--help}] [@b{-I} @var{dir}] [@b{-J}]
235 [@b{-K}] [@b{-L}] [@b{--listing-lhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
236 [@b{--listing-lhs-width2}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--listing-rhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
237 [@b{--listing-cont-lines}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--keep-locals}]
238 [@b{--no-pad-sections}]
239 [@b{-o} @var{objfile}] [@b{-R}]
240 [@b{--hash-size}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--reduce-memory-overheads}]
241 [@b{--statistics}]
242 [@b{-v}] [@b{-version}] [@b{--version}]
243 [@b{-W}] [@b{--warn}] [@b{--fatal-warnings}] [@b{-w}] [@b{-x}]
244 [@b{-Z}] [@b{@@@var{FILE}}]
245 [@b{--sectname-subst}] [@b{--size-check=[error|warning]}]
246 [@b{--elf-stt-common=[no|yes]}]
247 [@b{--target-help}] [@var{target-options}]
248 [@b{--}|@var{files} @dots{}]
249@c
250@c man end
251@c Target dependent options are listed below. Keep the list sorted.
252@c Add an empty line for separation.
253@c man begin TARGET
254@ifset AARCH64
255
256@emph{Target AArch64 options:}
257 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
258 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}]
259@end ifset
260@ifset ALPHA
261
262@emph{Target Alpha options:}
263 [@b{-m@var{cpu}}]
264 [@b{-mdebug} | @b{-no-mdebug}]
265 [@b{-replace} | @b{-noreplace}]
266 [@b{-relax}] [@b{-g}] [@b{-G@var{size}}]
267 [@b{-F}] [@b{-32addr}]
268@end ifset
269@ifset ARC
270
271@emph{Target ARC options:}
272 [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}]
273 [@b{-mA6}|@b{-mARC600}|@b{-mARC601}|@b{-mA7}|@b{-mARC700}|@b{-mEM}|@b{-mHS}]
274 [@b{-mcode-density}]
275 [@b{-mrelax}]
276 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
277@end ifset
278@ifset ARM
279
280@emph{Target ARM options:}
281@c Don't document the deprecated options
282 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
283 [@b{-march}=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
284 [@b{-mfpu}=@var{floating-point-format}]
285 [@b{-mfloat-abi}=@var{abi}]
286 [@b{-meabi}=@var{ver}]
287 [@b{-mthumb}]
288 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
289 [@b{-mapcs-32}|@b{-mapcs-26}|@b{-mapcs-float}|
290 @b{-mapcs-reentrant}]
291 [@b{-mthumb-interwork}] [@b{-k}]
292@end ifset
293@ifset Blackfin
294
295@emph{Target Blackfin options:}
296 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[-@var{sirevision}]]
297 [@b{-mfdpic}]
298 [@b{-mno-fdpic}]
299 [@b{-mnopic}]
300@end ifset
301@ifset CRIS
302
303@emph{Target CRIS options:}
304 [@b{--underscore} | @b{--no-underscore}]
305 [@b{--pic}] [@b{-N}]
306 [@b{--emulation=criself} | @b{--emulation=crisaout}]
307 [@b{--march=v0_v10} | @b{--march=v10} | @b{--march=v32} | @b{--march=common_v10_v32}]
308@c Deprecated -- deliberately not documented.
309@c [@b{-h}] [@b{-H}]
310@end ifset
311@ifset D10V
312
313@emph{Target D10V options:}
314 [@b{-O}]
315@end ifset
316@ifset D30V
317
318@emph{Target D30V options:}
319 [@b{-O}|@b{-n}|@b{-N}]
320@end ifset
321@ifset EPIPHANY
322
323@emph{Target EPIPHANY options:}
324 [@b{-mepiphany}|@b{-mepiphany16}]
325@end ifset
326@ifset H8
327
328@emph{Target H8/300 options:}
329 [-h-tick-hex]
330@end ifset
331@ifset HPPA
332@c HPPA has no machine-dependent assembler options (yet).
333@end ifset
334@ifset I80386
335
336@emph{Target i386 options:}
337 [@b{--32}|@b{--x32}|@b{--64}] [@b{-n}]
338 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}[+@var{EXTENSION}@dots{}]] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}]
339@end ifset
340@ifset I960
341
342@emph{Target i960 options:}
343@c see md_parse_option in tc-i960.c
344 [@b{-ACA}|@b{-ACA_A}|@b{-ACB}|@b{-ACC}|@b{-AKA}|@b{-AKB}|
345 @b{-AKC}|@b{-AMC}]
346 [@b{-b}] [@b{-no-relax}]
347@end ifset
348@ifset IA64
349
350@emph{Target IA-64 options:}
351 [@b{-mconstant-gp}|@b{-mauto-pic}]
352 [@b{-milp32}|@b{-milp64}|@b{-mlp64}|@b{-mp64}]
353 [@b{-mle}|@b{mbe}]
354 [@b{-mtune=itanium1}|@b{-mtune=itanium2}]
355 [@b{-munwind-check=warning}|@b{-munwind-check=error}]
356 [@b{-mhint.b=ok}|@b{-mhint.b=warning}|@b{-mhint.b=error}]
357 [@b{-x}|@b{-xexplicit}] [@b{-xauto}] [@b{-xdebug}]
358@end ifset
359@ifset IP2K
360
361@emph{Target IP2K options:}
362 [@b{-mip2022}|@b{-mip2022ext}]
363@end ifset
364@ifset M32C
365
366@emph{Target M32C options:}
367 [@b{-m32c}|@b{-m16c}] [-relax] [-h-tick-hex]
368@end ifset
369@ifset M32R
370
371@emph{Target M32R options:}
372 [@b{--m32rx}|@b{--[no-]warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts}|
373 @b{--W[n]p}]
374@end ifset
375@ifset M680X0
376
377@emph{Target M680X0 options:}
378 [@b{-l}] [@b{-m68000}|@b{-m68010}|@b{-m68020}|@dots{}]
379@end ifset
380@ifset M68HC11
381
382@emph{Target M68HC11 options:}
383 [@b{-m68hc11}|@b{-m68hc12}|@b{-m68hcs12}|@b{-mm9s12x}|@b{-mm9s12xg}]
384 [@b{-mshort}|@b{-mlong}]
385 [@b{-mshort-double}|@b{-mlong-double}]
386 [@b{--force-long-branches}] [@b{--short-branches}]
387 [@b{--strict-direct-mode}] [@b{--print-insn-syntax}]
388 [@b{--print-opcodes}] [@b{--generate-example}]
389@end ifset
390@ifset MCORE
391
392@emph{Target MCORE options:}
393 [@b{-jsri2bsr}] [@b{-sifilter}] [@b{-relax}]
394 [@b{-mcpu=[210|340]}]
395@end ifset
396@ifset METAG
397
398@emph{Target Meta options:}
399 [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mfpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mdsp=@var{cpu}}]
400@end ifset
401@ifset MICROBLAZE
402@emph{Target MICROBLAZE options:}
403@c MicroBlaze has no machine-dependent assembler options.
404@end ifset
405@ifset MIPS
406
407@emph{Target MIPS options:}
408 [@b{-nocpp}] [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}[@var{optimization level}]]
409 [@b{-g}[@var{debug level}]] [@b{-G} @var{num}] [@b{-KPIC}] [@b{-call_shared}]
410 [@b{-non_shared}] [@b{-xgot} [@b{-mvxworks-pic}]
411 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}] [@b{-32}] [@b{-n32}] [@b{-64}] [@b{-mfp32}] [@b{-mgp32}]
412 [@b{-mfp64}] [@b{-mgp64}] [@b{-mfpxx}]
413 [@b{-modd-spreg}] [@b{-mno-odd-spreg}]
414 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mips1}] [@b{-mips2}]
415 [@b{-mips3}] [@b{-mips4}] [@b{-mips5}] [@b{-mips32}] [@b{-mips32r2}]
416 [@b{-mips32r3}] [@b{-mips32r5}] [@b{-mips32r6}] [@b{-mips64}] [@b{-mips64r2}]
417 [@b{-mips64r3}] [@b{-mips64r5}] [@b{-mips64r6}]
418 [@b{-construct-floats}] [@b{-no-construct-floats}]
419 [@b{-mnan=@var{encoding}}]
420 [@b{-trap}] [@b{-no-break}] [@b{-break}] [@b{-no-trap}]
421 [@b{-mips16}] [@b{-no-mips16}]
422 [@b{-mmicromips}] [@b{-mno-micromips}]
423 [@b{-msmartmips}] [@b{-mno-smartmips}]
424 [@b{-mips3d}] [@b{-no-mips3d}]
425 [@b{-mdmx}] [@b{-no-mdmx}]
426 [@b{-mdsp}] [@b{-mno-dsp}]
427 [@b{-mdspr2}] [@b{-mno-dspr2}]
428 [@b{-mdspr3}] [@b{-mno-dspr3}]
429 [@b{-mmsa}] [@b{-mno-msa}]
430 [@b{-mxpa}] [@b{-mno-xpa}]
431 [@b{-mmt}] [@b{-mno-mt}]
432 [@b{-mmcu}] [@b{-mno-mcu}]
433 [@b{-minsn32}] [@b{-mno-insn32}]
434 [@b{-mfix7000}] [@b{-mno-fix7000}]
435 [@b{-mfix-rm7000}] [@b{-mno-fix-rm7000}]
436 [@b{-mfix-vr4120}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4120}]
437 [@b{-mfix-vr4130}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4130}]
438 [@b{-mdebug}] [@b{-no-mdebug}]
439 [@b{-mpdr}] [@b{-mno-pdr}]
440@end ifset
441@ifset MMIX
442
443@emph{Target MMIX options:}
444 [@b{--fixed-special-register-names}] [@b{--globalize-symbols}]
445 [@b{--gnu-syntax}] [@b{--relax}] [@b{--no-predefined-symbols}]
446 [@b{--no-expand}] [@b{--no-merge-gregs}] [@b{-x}]
447 [@b{--linker-allocated-gregs}]
448@end ifset
449@ifset NIOSII
450
451@emph{Target Nios II options:}
452 [@b{-relax-all}] [@b{-relax-section}] [@b{-no-relax}]
453 [@b{-EB}] [@b{-EL}]
454@end ifset
455@ifset NDS32
456
457@emph{Target NDS32 options:}
458 [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}] [@b{-Os}] [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}]
459 [@b{-misa=@var{isa}}] [@b{-mabi=@var{abi}}] [@b{-mall-ext}]
460 [@b{-m[no-]16-bit}] [@b{-m[no-]perf-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]perf2-ext}]
461 [@b{-m[no-]string-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]dsp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]mac}] [@b{-m[no-]div}]
462 [@b{-m[no-]audio-isa-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-sp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-dp-ext}]
463 [@b{-m[no-]fpu-fma}] [@b{-mfpu-freg=@var{FREG}}] [@b{-mreduced-regs}]
464 [@b{-mfull-regs}] [@b{-m[no-]dx-regs}] [@b{-mpic}] [@b{-mno-relax}]
465 [@b{-mb2bb}]
466@end ifset
467@ifset PDP11
468
469@emph{Target PDP11 options:}
470 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}] [@b{-mall}] [@b{-mno-extensions}]
471 [@b{-m}@var{extension}|@b{-mno-}@var{extension}]
472 [@b{-m}@var{cpu}] [@b{-m}@var{machine}]
473@end ifset
474@ifset PJ
475
476@emph{Target picoJava options:}
477 [@b{-mb}|@b{-me}]
478@end ifset
479@ifset PPC
480
481@emph{Target PowerPC options:}
482 [@b{-a32}|@b{-a64}]
483 [@b{-mpwrx}|@b{-mpwr2}|@b{-mpwr}|@b{-m601}|@b{-mppc}|@b{-mppc32}|@b{-m603}|@b{-m604}|@b{-m403}|@b{-m405}|
484 @b{-m440}|@b{-m464}|@b{-m476}|@b{-m7400}|@b{-m7410}|@b{-m7450}|@b{-m7455}|@b{-m750cl}|@b{-mppc64}|
485 @b{-m620}|@b{-me500}|@b{-e500x2}|@b{-me500mc}|@b{-me500mc64}|@b{-me5500}|@b{-me6500}|@b{-mppc64bridge}|
486 @b{-mbooke}|@b{-mpower4}|@b{-mpwr4}|@b{-mpower5}|@b{-mpwr5}|@b{-mpwr5x}|@b{-mpower6}|@b{-mpwr6}|
487 @b{-mpower7}|@b{-mpwr7}|@b{-mpower8}|@b{-mpwr8}|@b{-mpower9}|@b{-mpwr9}@b{-ma2}|
488 @b{-mcell}|@b{-mspe}|@b{-mtitan}|@b{-me300}|@b{-mcom}]
489 [@b{-many}] [@b{-maltivec}|@b{-mvsx}|@b{-mhtm}|@b{-mvle}]
490 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
491 [@b{-mrelocatable}|@b{-mrelocatable-lib}|@b{-K PIC}] [@b{-memb}]
492 [@b{-mlittle}|@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-le}|@b{-mbig}|@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-be}]
493 [@b{-msolaris}|@b{-mno-solaris}]
494 [@b{-nops=@var{count}}]
495@end ifset
496@ifset PRU
497
498@emph{Target PRU options:}
499 [@b{-link-relax}]
500 [@b{-mnolink-relax}]
501 [@b{-mno-warn-regname-label}]
502@end ifset
503@ifset RL78
504
505@emph{Target RL78 options:}
506 [@b{-mg10}]
507 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
508@end ifset
509@ifset RX
510
511@emph{Target RX options:}
512 [@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-mbig-endian}]
513 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
514 [@b{-muse-conventional-section-names}]
515 [@b{-msmall-data-limit}]
516 [@b{-mpid}]
517 [@b{-mrelax}]
518 [@b{-mint-register=@var{number}}]
519 [@b{-mgcc-abi}|@b{-mrx-abi}]
520@end ifset
521@ifset RISCV
522
523@emph{Target RISC-V options:}
524 [@b{-march}=@var{ISA}]
525 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}]
526@end ifset
527@ifset S390
528
529@emph{Target s390 options:}
530 [@b{-m31}|@b{-m64}] [@b{-mesa}|@b{-mzarch}] [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}]
531 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
532 [@b{-mwarn-areg-zero}]
533@end ifset
534@ifset SCORE
535
536@emph{Target SCORE options:}
537 [@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}][@b{-FIXDD}][@b{-NWARN}]
538 [@b{-SCORE5}][@b{-SCORE5U}][@b{-SCORE7}][@b{-SCORE3}]
539 [@b{-march=score7}][@b{-march=score3}]
540 [@b{-USE_R1}][@b{-KPIC}][@b{-O0}][@b{-G} @var{num}][@b{-V}]
541@end ifset
542@ifset SPARC
543
544@emph{Target SPARC options:}
545@c The order here is important. See c-sparc.texi.
546 [@b{-Av6}|@b{-Av7}|@b{-Av8}|@b{-Aleon}|@b{-Asparclet}|@b{-Asparclite}
547 @b{-Av8plus}|@b{-Av8plusa}|@b{-Av8plusb}|@b{-Av8plusc}|@b{-Av8plusd}
548 @b{-Av8plusv}|@b{-Av8plusm}|@b{-Av9}|@b{-Av9a}|@b{-Av9b}|@b{-Av9c}
549 @b{-Av9d}|@b{-Av9e}|@b{-Av9v}|@b{-Av9m}|@b{-Asparc}|@b{-Asparcvis}
550 @b{-Asparcvis2}|@b{-Asparcfmaf}|@b{-Asparcima}|@b{-Asparcvis3}
551 @b{-Asparcvisr}|@b{-Asparc5}]
552 [@b{-xarch=v8plus}|@b{-xarch=v8plusa}]|@b{-xarch=v8plusb}|@b{-xarch=v8plusc}
553 @b{-xarch=v8plusd}|@b{-xarch=v8plusv}|@b{-xarch=v8plusm}|@b{-xarch=v9}
554 @b{-xarch=v9a}|@b{-xarch=v9b}|@b{-xarch=v9c}|@b{-xarch=v9d}|@b{-xarch=v9e}
555 @b{-xarch=v9v}|@b{-xarch=v9m}|@b{-xarch=sparc}|@b{-xarch=sparcvis}
556 @b{-xarch=sparcvis2}|@b{-xarch=sparcfmaf}|@b{-xarch=sparcima}
557 @b{-xarch=sparcvis3}|@b{-xarch=sparcvisr}|@b{-xarch=sparc5}
558 @b{-bump}]
559 [@b{-32}|@b{-64}]
560 [@b{--enforce-aligned-data}][@b{--dcti-couples-detect}]
561@end ifset
562@ifset TIC54X
563
564@emph{Target TIC54X options:}
565 [@b{-mcpu=54[123589]}|@b{-mcpu=54[56]lp}] [@b{-mfar-mode}|@b{-mf}]
566 [@b{-merrors-to-file} @var{<filename>}|@b{-me} @var{<filename>}]
567@end ifset
568@ifset TIC6X
569
570@emph{Target TIC6X options:}
571 [@b{-march=@var{arch}}] [@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-mlittle-endian}]
572 [@b{-mdsbt}|@b{-mno-dsbt}] [@b{-mpid=no}|@b{-mpid=near}|@b{-mpid=far}]
573 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}]
574@end ifset
575@ifset TILEGX
576
577@emph{Target TILE-Gx options:}
578 [@b{-m32}|@b{-m64}][@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}]
579@end ifset
580@ifset TILEPRO
581@c TILEPro has no machine-dependent assembler options
582@end ifset
583@ifset VISIUM
584
585@emph{Target Visium options:}
586 [@b{-mtune=@var{arch}}]
587@end ifset
588@ifset XTENSA
589
590@emph{Target Xtensa options:}
591 [@b{--[no-]text-section-literals}] [@b{--[no-]auto-litpools}]
592 [@b{--[no-]absolute-literals}]
593 [@b{--[no-]target-align}] [@b{--[no-]longcalls}]
594 [@b{--[no-]transform}]
595 [@b{--rename-section} @var{oldname}=@var{newname}]
596 [@b{--[no-]trampolines}]
597@end ifset
598@ifset Z80
599
600@emph{Target Z80 options:}
601 [@b{-z80}] [@b{-r800}]
602 [@b{ -ignore-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wnud}]
603 [@b{ -ignore-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wnup}]
604 [@b{ -warn-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wud}]
605 [@b{ -warn-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wup}]
606 [@b{ -forbid-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Fud}]
607 [@b{ -forbid-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Fup}]
608@end ifset
609@ifset Z8000
610
611@c Z8000 has no machine-dependent assembler options
612@end ifset
613
614@c man end
615@end smallexample
616
617@c man begin OPTIONS
618
619@table @gcctabopt
620@include at-file.texi
621
622@item -a[cdghlmns]
623Turn on listings, in any of a variety of ways:
624
625@table @gcctabopt
626@item -ac
627omit false conditionals
628
629@item -ad
630omit debugging directives
631
632@item -ag
633include general information, like @value{AS} version and options passed
634
635@item -ah
636include high-level source
637
638@item -al
639include assembly
640
641@item -am
642include macro expansions
643
644@item -an
645omit forms processing
646
647@item -as
648include symbols
649
650@item =file
651set the name of the listing file
652@end table
653
654You may combine these options; for example, use @samp{-aln} for assembly
655listing without forms processing. The @samp{=file} option, if used, must be
656the last one. By itself, @samp{-a} defaults to @samp{-ahls}.
657
658@item --alternate
659Begin in alternate macro mode.
660@ifclear man
661@xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
662@end ifclear
663
664@item --compress-debug-sections
665Compress DWARF debug sections using zlib with SHF_COMPRESSED from the
666ELF ABI. The resulting object file may not be compatible with older
667linkers and object file utilities. Note if compression would make a
668given section @emph{larger} then it is not compressed.
669
670@ifset ELF
671@cindex @samp{--compress-debug-sections=} option
672@item --compress-debug-sections=none
673@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
674@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
675@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
676These options control how DWARF debug sections are compressed.
677@option{--compress-debug-sections=none} is equivalent to
678@option{--nocompress-debug-sections}.
679@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} and
680@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi} are equivalent to
681@option{--compress-debug-sections}.
682@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses DWARF debug
683sections using zlib. The debug sections are renamed to begin with
684@samp{.zdebug}. Note if compression would make a given section
685@emph{larger} then it is not compressed nor renamed.
686
687@end ifset
688
689@item --nocompress-debug-sections
690Do not compress DWARF debug sections. This is usually the default for all
691targets except the x86/x86_64, but a configure time option can be used to
692override this.
693
694@item -D
695Ignored. This option is accepted for script compatibility with calls to
696other assemblers.
697
698@item --debug-prefix-map @var{old}=@var{new}
699When assembling files in directory @file{@var{old}}, record debugging
700information describing them as in @file{@var{new}} instead.
701
702@item --defsym @var{sym}=@var{value}
703Define the symbol @var{sym} to be @var{value} before assembling the input file.
704@var{value} must be an integer constant. As in C, a leading @samp{0x}
705indicates a hexadecimal value, and a leading @samp{0} indicates an octal
706value. The value of the symbol can be overridden inside a source file via the
707use of a @code{.set} pseudo-op.
708
709@item -f
710``fast''---skip whitespace and comment preprocessing (assume source is
711compiler output).
712
713@item -g
714@itemx --gen-debug
715Generate debugging information for each assembler source line using whichever
716debug format is preferred by the target. This currently means either STABS,
717ECOFF or DWARF2.
718
719@item --gstabs
720Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line. This
721may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it.
722
723@item --gstabs+
724Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line, with GNU
725extensions that probably only gdb can handle, and that could make other
726debuggers crash or refuse to read your program. This
727may help debugging assembler code. Currently the only GNU extension is
728the location of the current working directory at assembling time.
729
730@item --gdwarf-2
731Generate DWARF2 debugging information for each assembler line. This
732may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it. Note---this
733option is only supported by some targets, not all of them.
734
735@item --gdwarf-sections
736Instead of creating a .debug_line section, create a series of
737.debug_line.@var{foo} sections where @var{foo} is the name of the
738corresponding code section. For example a code section called @var{.text.func}
739will have its dwarf line number information placed into a section called
740@var{.debug_line.text.func}. If the code section is just called @var{.text}
741then debug line section will still be called just @var{.debug_line} without any
742suffix.
743
744@ifset ELF
745@item --size-check=error
746@itemx --size-check=warning
747Issue an error or warning for invalid ELF .size directive.
748
749@item --elf-stt-common=no
750@itemx --elf-stt-common=yes
751These options control whether the ELF assembler should generate common
752symbols with the @code{STT_COMMON} type. The default can be controlled
753by a configure option @option{--enable-elf-stt-common}.
754@end ifset
755
756@item --help
757Print a summary of the command line options and exit.
758
759@item --target-help
760Print a summary of all target specific options and exit.
761
762@item -I @var{dir}
763Add directory @var{dir} to the search list for @code{.include} directives.
764
765@item -J
766Don't warn about signed overflow.
767
768@item -K
769@ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
770This option is accepted but has no effect on the @value{TARGET} family.
771@end ifclear
772@ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
773Issue warnings when difference tables altered for long displacements.
774@end ifset
775
776@item -L
777@itemx --keep-locals
778Keep (in the symbol table) local symbols. These symbols start with
779system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
780or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.
781@ifclear man
782@xref{Symbol Names}.
783@end ifclear
784
785@item --listing-lhs-width=@var{number}
786Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for an assembler
787listing to @var{number}.
788
789@item --listing-lhs-width2=@var{number}
790Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for continuation
791lines in an assembler listing to @var{number}.
792
793@item --listing-rhs-width=@var{number}
794Set the maximum width of an input source line, as displayed in a listing, to
795@var{number} bytes.
796
797@item --listing-cont-lines=@var{number}
798Set the maximum number of lines printed in a listing for a single line of input
799to @var{number} + 1.
800
801@item --no-pad-sections
802Stop the assembler for padding the ends of output sections to the alignment
803of that section. The default is to pad the sections, but this can waste space
804which might be needed on targets which have tight memory constraints.
805
806@item -o @var{objfile}
807Name the object-file output from @command{@value{AS}} @var{objfile}.
808
809@item -R
810Fold the data section into the text section.
811
812@item --hash-size=@var{number}
813Set the default size of GAS's hash tables to a prime number close to
814@var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of time it takes the
815assembler to perform its tasks, at the expense of increasing the assembler's
816memory requirements. Similarly reducing this value can reduce the memory
817requirements at the expense of speed.
818
819@item --reduce-memory-overheads
820This option reduces GAS's memory requirements, at the expense of making the
821assembly processes slower. Currently this switch is a synonym for
822@samp{--hash-size=4051}, but in the future it may have other effects as well.
823
824@ifset ELF
825@item --sectname-subst
826Honor substitution sequences in section names.
827@ifclear man
828@xref{Section Name Substitutions,,@code{.section @var{name}}}.
829@end ifclear
830@end ifset
831
832@item --statistics
833Print the maximum space (in bytes) and total time (in seconds) used by
834assembly.
835
836@item --strip-local-absolute
837Remove local absolute symbols from the outgoing symbol table.
838
839@item -v
840@itemx -version
841Print the @command{as} version.
842
843@item --version
844Print the @command{as} version and exit.
845
846@item -W
847@itemx --no-warn
848Suppress warning messages.
849
850@item --fatal-warnings
851Treat warnings as errors.
852
853@item --warn
854Don't suppress warning messages or treat them as errors.
855
856@item -w
857Ignored.
858
859@item -x
860Ignored.
861
862@item -Z
863Generate an object file even after errors.
864
865@item -- | @var{files} @dots{}
866Standard input, or source files to assemble.
867
868@end table
869@c man end
870
871@ifset AARCH64
872
873@ifclear man
874@xref{AArch64 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
875for the 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
876@end ifclear
877
878@ifset man
879@c man begin OPTIONS
880The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
88164-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
882@c man end
883@c man begin INCLUDE
884@include c-aarch64.texi
885@c ended inside the included file
886@end ifset
887
888@end ifset
889
890@ifset ALPHA
891
892@ifclear man
893@xref{Alpha Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
894for an Alpha processor.
895@end ifclear
896
897@ifset man
898@c man begin OPTIONS
899The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an Alpha
900processor.
901@c man end
902@c man begin INCLUDE
903@include c-alpha.texi
904@c ended inside the included file
905@end ifset
906
907@end ifset
908
909@c man begin OPTIONS
910@ifset ARC
911The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an ARC
912processor.
913
914@table @gcctabopt
915@item -mcpu=@var{cpu}
916This option selects the core processor variant.
917@item -EB | -EL
918Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
919@item -mcode-density
920Enable Code Density extenssion instructions.
921@end table
922@end ifset
923
924@ifset ARM
925The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the ARM
926processor family.
927
928@table @gcctabopt
929@item -mcpu=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
930Specify which ARM processor variant is the target.
931@item -march=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
932Specify which ARM architecture variant is used by the target.
933@item -mfpu=@var{floating-point-format}
934Select which Floating Point architecture is the target.
935@item -mfloat-abi=@var{abi}
936Select which floating point ABI is in use.
937@item -mthumb
938Enable Thumb only instruction decoding.
939@item -mapcs-32 | -mapcs-26 | -mapcs-float | -mapcs-reentrant
940Select which procedure calling convention is in use.
941@item -EB | -EL
942Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
943@item -mthumb-interwork
944Specify that the code has been generated with interworking between Thumb and
945ARM code in mind.
946@item -mccs
947Turns on CodeComposer Studio assembly syntax compatibility mode.
948@item -k
949Specify that PIC code has been generated.
950@end table
951@end ifset
952@c man end
953
954@ifset Blackfin
955
956@ifclear man
957@xref{Blackfin Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
958configured for the Blackfin processor family.
959@end ifclear
960
961@ifset man
962@c man begin OPTIONS
963The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
964the Blackfin processor family.
965@c man end
966@c man begin INCLUDE
967@include c-bfin.texi
968@c ended inside the included file
969@end ifset
970
971@end ifset
972
973@c man begin OPTIONS
974@ifset CRIS
975See the info pages for documentation of the CRIS-specific options.
976@end ifset
977
978@ifset D10V
979The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
980a D10V processor.
981@table @gcctabopt
982@cindex D10V optimization
983@cindex optimization, D10V
984@item -O
985Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
986@end table
987@end ifset
988
989@ifset D30V
990The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a D30V
991processor.
992@table @gcctabopt
993@cindex D30V optimization
994@cindex optimization, D30V
995@item -O
996Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
997
998@cindex D30V nops
999@item -n
1000Warn when nops are generated.
1001
1002@cindex D30V nops after 32-bit multiply
1003@item -N
1004Warn when a nop after a 32-bit multiply instruction is generated.
1005@end table
1006@end ifset
1007@c man end
1008
1009@ifset EPIPHANY
1010The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1011Adapteva EPIPHANY series.
1012
1013@ifclear man
1014@xref{Epiphany Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
1015configured for an Epiphany processor.
1016@end ifclear
1017
1018@ifset man
1019@c man begin OPTIONS
1020The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1021an Epiphany processor.
1022@c man end
1023@c man begin INCLUDE
1024@include c-epiphany.texi
1025@c ended inside the included file
1026@end ifset
1027
1028@end ifset
1029
1030@ifset H8300
1031
1032@ifclear man
1033@xref{H8/300 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1034for an H8/300 processor.
1035@end ifclear
1036
1037@ifset man
1038@c man begin OPTIONS
1039The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an H8/300
1040processor.
1041@c man end
1042@c man begin INCLUDE
1043@include c-h8300.texi
1044@c ended inside the included file
1045@end ifset
1046
1047@end ifset
1048
1049@ifset I80386
1050
1051@ifclear man
1052@xref{i386-Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
1053configured for an i386 processor.
1054@end ifclear
1055
1056@ifset man
1057@c man begin OPTIONS
1058The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1059an i386 processor.
1060@c man end
1061@c man begin INCLUDE
1062@include c-i386.texi
1063@c ended inside the included file
1064@end ifset
1065
1066@end ifset
1067
1068@c man begin OPTIONS
1069@ifset I960
1070The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1071Intel 80960 processor.
1072
1073@table @gcctabopt
1074@item -ACA | -ACA_A | -ACB | -ACC | -AKA | -AKB | -AKC | -AMC
1075Specify which variant of the 960 architecture is the target.
1076
1077@item -b
1078Add code to collect statistics about branches taken.
1079
1080@item -no-relax
1081Do not alter compare-and-branch instructions for long displacements;
1082error if necessary.
1083
1084@end table
1085@end ifset
1086
1087@ifset IP2K
1088The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1089Ubicom IP2K series.
1090
1091@table @gcctabopt
1092
1093@item -mip2022ext
1094Specifies that the extended IP2022 instructions are allowed.
1095
1096@item -mip2022
1097Restores the default behaviour, which restricts the permitted instructions to
1098just the basic IP2022 ones.
1099
1100@end table
1101@end ifset
1102
1103@ifset M32C
1104The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1105Renesas M32C and M16C processors.
1106
1107@table @gcctabopt
1108
1109@item -m32c
1110Assemble M32C instructions.
1111
1112@item -m16c
1113Assemble M16C instructions (the default).
1114
1115@item -relax
1116Enable support for link-time relaxations.
1117
1118@item -h-tick-hex
1119Support H'00 style hex constants in addition to 0x00 style.
1120
1121@end table
1122@end ifset
1123
1124@ifset M32R
1125The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1126Renesas M32R (formerly Mitsubishi M32R) series.
1127
1128@table @gcctabopt
1129
1130@item --m32rx
1131Specify which processor in the M32R family is the target. The default
1132is normally the M32R, but this option changes it to the M32RX.
1133
1134@item --warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wp
1135Produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1136encountered.
1137
1138@item --no-warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wnp
1139Do not produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1140encountered.
1141
1142@end table
1143@end ifset
1144
1145@ifset M680X0
1146The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1147Motorola 68000 series.
1148
1149@table @gcctabopt
1150
1151@item -l
1152Shorten references to undefined symbols, to one word instead of two.
1153
1154@item -m68000 | -m68008 | -m68010 | -m68020 | -m68030
1155@itemx | -m68040 | -m68060 | -m68302 | -m68331 | -m68332
1156@itemx | -m68333 | -m68340 | -mcpu32 | -m5200
1157Specify what processor in the 68000 family is the target. The default
1158is normally the 68020, but this can be changed at configuration time.
1159
1160@item -m68881 | -m68882 | -mno-68881 | -mno-68882
1161The target machine does (or does not) have a floating-point coprocessor.
1162The default is to assume a coprocessor for 68020, 68030, and cpu32. Although
1163the basic 68000 is not compatible with the 68881, a combination of the
1164two can be specified, since it's possible to do emulation of the
1165coprocessor instructions with the main processor.
1166
1167@item -m68851 | -mno-68851
1168The target machine does (or does not) have a memory-management
1169unit coprocessor. The default is to assume an MMU for 68020 and up.
1170
1171@end table
1172@end ifset
1173
1174@ifset NIOSII
1175
1176@ifclear man
1177@xref{Nios II Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1178for an Altera Nios II processor.
1179@end ifclear
1180
1181@ifset man
1182@c man begin OPTIONS
1183The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1184Altera Nios II processor.
1185@c man end
1186@c man begin INCLUDE
1187@include c-nios2.texi
1188@c ended inside the included file
1189@end ifset
1190@end ifset
1191
1192@ifset PDP11
1193
1194For details about the PDP-11 machine dependent features options,
1195see @ref{PDP-11-Options}.
1196
1197@table @gcctabopt
1198@item -mpic | -mno-pic
1199Generate position-independent (or position-dependent) code. The
1200default is @option{-mpic}.
1201
1202@item -mall
1203@itemx -mall-extensions
1204Enable all instruction set extensions. This is the default.
1205
1206@item -mno-extensions
1207Disable all instruction set extensions.
1208
1209@item -m@var{extension} | -mno-@var{extension}
1210Enable (or disable) a particular instruction set extension.
1211
1212@item -m@var{cpu}
1213Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular CPU, and
1214disable all other extensions.
1215
1216@item -m@var{machine}
1217Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular machine
1218model, and disable all other extensions.
1219@end table
1220
1221@end ifset
1222
1223@ifset PJ
1224The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1225a picoJava processor.
1226
1227@table @gcctabopt
1228
1229@cindex PJ endianness
1230@cindex endianness, PJ
1231@cindex big endian output, PJ
1232@item -mb
1233Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1234
1235@cindex little endian output, PJ
1236@item -ml
1237Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1238
1239@end table
1240@end ifset
1241
1242@ifset PRU
1243
1244@ifclear man
1245@xref{PRU Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1246for a PRU processor.
1247@end ifclear
1248
1249@ifset man
1250@c man begin OPTIONS
1251The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1252PRU processor.
1253@c man end
1254@c man begin INCLUDE
1255@include c-pru.texi
1256@c ended inside the included file
1257@end ifset
1258@end ifset
1259
1260@ifset M68HC11
1261The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1262Motorola 68HC11 or 68HC12 series.
1263
1264@table @gcctabopt
1265
1266@item -m68hc11 | -m68hc12 | -m68hcs12 | -mm9s12x | -mm9s12xg
1267Specify what processor is the target. The default is
1268defined by the configuration option when building the assembler.
1269
1270@item --xgate-ramoffset
1271Instruct the linker to offset RAM addresses from S12X address space into
1272XGATE address space.
1273
1274@item -mshort
1275Specify to use the 16-bit integer ABI.
1276
1277@item -mlong
1278Specify to use the 32-bit integer ABI.
1279
1280@item -mshort-double
1281Specify to use the 32-bit double ABI.
1282
1283@item -mlong-double
1284Specify to use the 64-bit double ABI.
1285
1286@item --force-long-branches
1287Relative branches are turned into absolute ones. This concerns
1288conditional branches, unconditional branches and branches to a
1289sub routine.
1290
1291@item -S | --short-branches
1292Do not turn relative branches into absolute ones
1293when the offset is out of range.
1294
1295@item --strict-direct-mode
1296Do not turn the direct addressing mode into extended addressing mode
1297when the instruction does not support direct addressing mode.
1298
1299@item --print-insn-syntax
1300Print the syntax of instruction in case of error.
1301
1302@item --print-opcodes
1303Print the list of instructions with syntax and then exit.
1304
1305@item --generate-example
1306Print an example of instruction for each possible instruction and then exit.
1307This option is only useful for testing @command{@value{AS}}.
1308
1309@end table
1310@end ifset
1311
1312@ifset SPARC
1313The following options are available when @command{@value{AS}} is configured
1314for the SPARC architecture:
1315
1316@table @gcctabopt
1317@item -Av6 | -Av7 | -Av8 | -Asparclet | -Asparclite
1318@itemx -Av8plus | -Av8plusa | -Av9 | -Av9a
1319Explicitly select a variant of the SPARC architecture.
1320
1321@samp{-Av8plus} and @samp{-Av8plusa} select a 32 bit environment.
1322@samp{-Av9} and @samp{-Av9a} select a 64 bit environment.
1323
1324@samp{-Av8plusa} and @samp{-Av9a} enable the SPARC V9 instruction set with
1325UltraSPARC extensions.
1326
1327@item -xarch=v8plus | -xarch=v8plusa
1328For compatibility with the Solaris v9 assembler. These options are
1329equivalent to -Av8plus and -Av8plusa, respectively.
1330
1331@item -bump
1332Warn when the assembler switches to another architecture.
1333@end table
1334@end ifset
1335
1336@ifset TIC54X
1337The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 'c54x
1338architecture.
1339
1340@table @gcctabopt
1341@item -mfar-mode
1342Enable extended addressing mode. All addresses and relocations will assume
1343extended addressing (usually 23 bits).
1344@item -mcpu=@var{CPU_VERSION}
1345Sets the CPU version being compiled for.
1346@item -merrors-to-file @var{FILENAME}
1347Redirect error output to a file, for broken systems which don't support such
1348behaviour in the shell.
1349@end table
1350@end ifset
1351
1352@ifset MIPS
1353The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1354a MIPS processor.
1355
1356@table @gcctabopt
1357@item -G @var{num}
1358This option sets the largest size of an object that can be referenced
1359implicitly with the @code{gp} register. It is only accepted for targets that
1360use ECOFF format, such as a DECstation running Ultrix. The default value is 8.
1361
1362@cindex MIPS endianness
1363@cindex endianness, MIPS
1364@cindex big endian output, MIPS
1365@item -EB
1366Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1367
1368@cindex little endian output, MIPS
1369@item -EL
1370Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1371
1372@cindex MIPS ISA
1373@item -mips1
1374@itemx -mips2
1375@itemx -mips3
1376@itemx -mips4
1377@itemx -mips5
1378@itemx -mips32
1379@itemx -mips32r2
1380@itemx -mips32r3
1381@itemx -mips32r5
1382@itemx -mips32r6
1383@itemx -mips64
1384@itemx -mips64r2
1385@itemx -mips64r3
1386@itemx -mips64r5
1387@itemx -mips64r6
1388Generate code for a particular MIPS Instruction Set Architecture level.
1389@samp{-mips1} is an alias for @samp{-march=r3000}, @samp{-mips2} is an
1390alias for @samp{-march=r6000}, @samp{-mips3} is an alias for
1391@samp{-march=r4000} and @samp{-mips4} is an alias for @samp{-march=r8000}.
1392@samp{-mips5}, @samp{-mips32}, @samp{-mips32r2}, @samp{-mips32r3},
1393@samp{-mips32r5}, @samp{-mips32r6}, @samp{-mips64}, @samp{-mips64r2},
1394@samp{-mips64r3}, @samp{-mips64r5}, and @samp{-mips64r6} correspond to generic
1395MIPS V, MIPS32, MIPS32 Release 2, MIPS32 Release 3, MIPS32 Release 5, MIPS32
1396Release 6, MIPS64, MIPS64 Release 2, MIPS64 Release 3, MIPS64 Release 5, and
1397MIPS64 Release 6 ISA processors, respectively.
1398
1399@item -march=@var{cpu}
1400Generate code for a particular MIPS CPU.
1401
1402@item -mtune=@var{cpu}
1403Schedule and tune for a particular MIPS CPU.
1404
1405@item -mfix7000
1406@itemx -mno-fix7000
1407Cause nops to be inserted if the read of the destination register
1408of an mfhi or mflo instruction occurs in the following two instructions.
1409
1410@item -mfix-rm7000
1411@itemx -mno-fix-rm7000
1412Cause nops to be inserted if a dmult or dmultu instruction is
1413followed by a load instruction.
1414
1415@item -mdebug
1416@itemx -no-mdebug
1417Cause stabs-style debugging output to go into an ECOFF-style .mdebug
1418section instead of the standard ELF .stabs sections.
1419
1420@item -mpdr
1421@itemx -mno-pdr
1422Control generation of @code{.pdr} sections.
1423
1424@item -mgp32
1425@itemx -mfp32
1426The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1427flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 32 bits wide at
1428all times. @samp{-mgp32} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1429and @samp{-mfp32} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1430
1431@item -mgp64
1432@itemx -mfp64
1433The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1434flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 64 bits wide at
1435all times. @samp{-mgp64} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1436and @samp{-mfp64} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1437
1438@item -mfpxx
1439The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but using
1440this flag in combination with @samp{-mabi=32} enables an ABI variant
1441which will operate correctly with floating-point registers which are
144232 or 64 bits wide.
1443
1444@item -modd-spreg
1445@itemx -mno-odd-spreg
1446Enable use of floating-point operations on odd-numbered single-precision
1447registers when supported by the ISA. @samp{-mfpxx} implies
1448@samp{-mno-odd-spreg}, otherwise the default is @samp{-modd-spreg}.
1449
1450@item -mips16
1451@itemx -no-mips16
1452Generate code for the MIPS 16 processor. This is equivalent to putting
1453@code{.set mips16} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-no-mips16}
1454turns off this option.
1455
1456@item -mmicromips
1457@itemx -mno-micromips
1458Generate code for the microMIPS processor. This is equivalent to putting
1459@code{.set micromips} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-micromips}
1460turns off this option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set nomicromips}
1461at the start of the assembly file.
1462
1463@item -msmartmips
1464@itemx -mno-smartmips
1465Enables the SmartMIPS extension to the MIPS32 instruction set. This is
1466equivalent to putting @code{.set smartmips} at the start of the assembly file.
1467@samp{-mno-smartmips} turns off this option.
1468
1469@item -mips3d
1470@itemx -no-mips3d
1471Generate code for the MIPS-3D Application Specific Extension.
1472This tells the assembler to accept MIPS-3D instructions.
1473@samp{-no-mips3d} turns off this option.
1474
1475@item -mdmx
1476@itemx -no-mdmx
1477Generate code for the MDMX Application Specific Extension.
1478This tells the assembler to accept MDMX instructions.
1479@samp{-no-mdmx} turns off this option.
1480
1481@item -mdsp
1482@itemx -mno-dsp
1483Generate code for the DSP Release 1 Application Specific Extension.
1484This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 1 instructions.
1485@samp{-mno-dsp} turns off this option.
1486
1487@item -mdspr2
1488@itemx -mno-dspr2
1489Generate code for the DSP Release 2 Application Specific Extension.
1490This option implies @samp{-mdsp}.
1491This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 2 instructions.
1492@samp{-mno-dspr2} turns off this option.
1493
1494@item -mdspr3
1495@itemx -mno-dspr3
1496Generate code for the DSP Release 3 Application Specific Extension.
1497This option implies @samp{-mdsp} and @samp{-mdspr2}.
1498This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 3 instructions.
1499@samp{-mno-dspr3} turns off this option.
1500
1501@item -mmsa
1502@itemx -mno-msa
1503Generate code for the MIPS SIMD Architecture Extension.
1504This tells the assembler to accept MSA instructions.
1505@samp{-mno-msa} turns off this option.
1506
1507@item -mxpa
1508@itemx -mno-xpa
1509Generate code for the MIPS eXtended Physical Address (XPA) Extension.
1510This tells the assembler to accept XPA instructions.
1511@samp{-mno-xpa} turns off this option.
1512
1513@item -mmt
1514@itemx -mno-mt
1515Generate code for the MT Application Specific Extension.
1516This tells the assembler to accept MT instructions.
1517@samp{-mno-mt} turns off this option.
1518
1519@item -mmcu
1520@itemx -mno-mcu
1521Generate code for the MCU Application Specific Extension.
1522This tells the assembler to accept MCU instructions.
1523@samp{-mno-mcu} turns off this option.
1524
1525@item -minsn32
1526@itemx -mno-insn32
1527Only use 32-bit instruction encodings when generating code for the
1528microMIPS processor. This option inhibits the use of any 16-bit
1529instructions. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set insn32} at
1530the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-insn32} turns off this
1531option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set noinsn32} at the
1532start of the assembly file. By default @samp{-mno-insn32} is
1533selected, allowing all instructions to be used.
1534
1535@item --construct-floats
1536@itemx --no-construct-floats
1537The @samp{--no-construct-floats} option disables the construction of
1538double width floating point constants by loading the two halves of the
1539value into the two single width floating point registers that make up
1540the double width register. By default @samp{--construct-floats} is
1541selected, allowing construction of these floating point constants.
1542
1543@item --relax-branch
1544@itemx --no-relax-branch
1545The @samp{--relax-branch} option enables the relaxation of out-of-range
1546branches. By default @samp{--no-relax-branch} is selected, causing any
1547out-of-range branches to produce an error.
1548
1549@item -mnan=@var{encoding}
1550Select between the IEEE 754-2008 (@option{-mnan=2008}) or the legacy
1551(@option{-mnan=legacy}) NaN encoding format. The latter is the default.
1552
1553@cindex emulation
1554@item --emulation=@var{name}
1555This option was formerly used to switch between ELF and ECOFF output
1556on targets like IRIX 5 that supported both. MIPS ECOFF support was
1557removed in GAS 2.24, so the option now serves little purpose.
1558It is retained for backwards compatibility.
1559
1560The available configuration names are: @samp{mipself}, @samp{mipslelf} and
1561@samp{mipsbelf}. Choosing @samp{mipself} now has no effect, since the output
1562is always ELF. @samp{mipslelf} and @samp{mipsbelf} select little- and
1563big-endian output respectively, but @samp{-EL} and @samp{-EB} are now the
1564preferred options instead.
1565
1566@item -nocpp
1567@command{@value{AS}} ignores this option. It is accepted for compatibility with
1568the native tools.
1569
1570@item --trap
1571@itemx --no-trap
1572@itemx --break
1573@itemx --no-break
1574Control how to deal with multiplication overflow and division by zero.
1575@samp{--trap} or @samp{--no-break} (which are synonyms) take a trap exception
1576(and only work for Instruction Set Architecture level 2 and higher);
1577@samp{--break} or @samp{--no-trap} (also synonyms, and the default) take a
1578break exception.
1579
1580@item -n
1581When this option is used, @command{@value{AS}} will issue a warning every
1582time it generates a nop instruction from a macro.
1583@end table
1584@end ifset
1585
1586@ifset MCORE
1587The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1588an MCore processor.
1589
1590@table @gcctabopt
1591@item -jsri2bsr
1592@itemx -nojsri2bsr
1593Enable or disable the JSRI to BSR transformation. By default this is enabled.
1594The command line option @samp{-nojsri2bsr} can be used to disable it.
1595
1596@item -sifilter
1597@itemx -nosifilter
1598Enable or disable the silicon filter behaviour. By default this is disabled.
1599The default can be overridden by the @samp{-sifilter} command line option.
1600
1601@item -relax
1602Alter jump instructions for long displacements.
1603
1604@item -mcpu=[210|340]
1605Select the cpu type on the target hardware. This controls which instructions
1606can be assembled.
1607
1608@item -EB
1609Assemble for a big endian target.
1610
1611@item -EL
1612Assemble for a little endian target.
1613
1614@end table
1615@end ifset
1616@c man end
1617
1618@ifset METAG
1619
1620@ifclear man
1621@xref{Meta Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1622for a Meta processor.
1623@end ifclear
1624
1625@ifset man
1626@c man begin OPTIONS
1627The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1628Meta processor.
1629@c man end
1630@c man begin INCLUDE
1631@include c-metag.texi
1632@c ended inside the included file
1633@end ifset
1634
1635@end ifset
1636
1637@c man begin OPTIONS
1638@ifset MMIX
1639See the info pages for documentation of the MMIX-specific options.
1640@end ifset
1641
1642@ifset NDS32
1643
1644@ifclear man
1645@xref{NDS32 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1646for a NDS32 processor.
1647@end ifclear
1648@c ended inside the included file
1649@end ifset
1650
1651@ifset man
1652@c man begin OPTIONS
1653The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1654NDS32 processor.
1655@c man end
1656@c man begin INCLUDE
1657@include c-nds32.texi
1658@c ended inside the included file
1659@end ifset
1660
1661@c man end
1662@ifset PPC
1663
1664@ifclear man
1665@xref{PowerPC-Opts}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1666for a PowerPC processor.
1667@end ifclear
1668
1669@ifset man
1670@c man begin OPTIONS
1671The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1672PowerPC processor.
1673@c man end
1674@c man begin INCLUDE
1675@include c-ppc.texi
1676@c ended inside the included file
1677@end ifset
1678
1679@end ifset
1680
1681@ifset RISCV
1682
1683@ifclear man
1684@xref{RISC-V-Opts}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1685for a RISC-V processor.
1686@end ifclear
1687
1688@ifset man
1689@c man begin OPTIONS
1690The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1691RISC-V processor.
1692@c man end
1693@c man begin INCLUDE
1694@include c-riscv.texi
1695@c ended inside the included file
1696@end ifset
1697
1698@end ifset
1699
1700@c man begin OPTIONS
1701@ifset RX
1702See the info pages for documentation of the RX-specific options.
1703@end ifset
1704
1705@ifset S390
1706The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the s390
1707processor family.
1708
1709@table @gcctabopt
1710@item -m31
1711@itemx -m64
1712Select the word size, either 31/32 bits or 64 bits.
1713@item -mesa
1714@item -mzarch
1715Select the architecture mode, either the Enterprise System
1716Architecture (esa) or the z/Architecture mode (zarch).
1717@item -march=@var{processor}
1718Specify which s390 processor variant is the target, @samp{g5} (or
1719@samp{arch3}), @samp{g6}, @samp{z900} (or @samp{arch5}), @samp{z990} (or
1720@samp{arch6}), @samp{z9-109}, @samp{z9-ec} (or @samp{arch7}), @samp{z10} (or
1721@samp{arch8}), @samp{z196} (or @samp{arch9}), @samp{zEC12} (or @samp{arch10}),
1722or @samp{z13} (or @samp{arch11}).
1723@item -mregnames
1724@itemx -mno-regnames
1725Allow or disallow symbolic names for registers.
1726@item -mwarn-areg-zero
1727Warn whenever the operand for a base or index register has been specified
1728but evaluates to zero.
1729@end table
1730@end ifset
1731@c man end
1732
1733@ifset TIC6X
1734
1735@ifclear man
1736@xref{TIC6X Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1737for a TMS320C6000 processor.
1738@end ifclear
1739
1740@ifset man
1741@c man begin OPTIONS
1742The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1743TMS320C6000 processor.
1744@c man end
1745@c man begin INCLUDE
1746@include c-tic6x.texi
1747@c ended inside the included file
1748@end ifset
1749
1750@end ifset
1751
1752@ifset TILEGX
1753
1754@ifclear man
1755@xref{TILE-Gx Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1756for a TILE-Gx processor.
1757@end ifclear
1758
1759@ifset man
1760@c man begin OPTIONS
1761The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a TILE-Gx
1762processor.
1763@c man end
1764@c man begin INCLUDE
1765@include c-tilegx.texi
1766@c ended inside the included file
1767@end ifset
1768
1769@end ifset
1770
1771@ifset VISIUM
1772
1773@ifclear man
1774@xref{Visium Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1775for a Visium processor.
1776@end ifclear
1777
1778@ifset man
1779@c man begin OPTIONS
1780The following option is available when @value{AS} is configured for a Visium
1781processor.
1782@c man end
1783@c man begin INCLUDE
1784@include c-visium.texi
1785@c ended inside the included file
1786@end ifset
1787
1788@end ifset
1789
1790@ifset XTENSA
1791
1792@ifclear man
1793@xref{Xtensa Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1794for an Xtensa processor.
1795@end ifclear
1796
1797@ifset man
1798@c man begin OPTIONS
1799The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1800Xtensa processor.
1801@c man end
1802@c man begin INCLUDE
1803@include c-xtensa.texi
1804@c ended inside the included file
1805@end ifset
1806
1807@end ifset
1808
1809@c man begin OPTIONS
1810
1811@ifset Z80
1812The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1813a Z80 family processor.
1814@table @gcctabopt
1815@item -z80
1816Assemble for Z80 processor.
1817@item -r800
1818Assemble for R800 processor.
1819@item -ignore-undocumented-instructions
1820@itemx -Wnud
1821Assemble undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800 without warning.
1822@item -ignore-unportable-instructions
1823@itemx -Wnup
1824Assemble all undocumented Z80 instructions without warning.
1825@item -warn-undocumented-instructions
1826@itemx -Wud
1827Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800.
1828@item -warn-unportable-instructions
1829@itemx -Wup
1830Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800.
1831@item -forbid-undocumented-instructions
1832@itemx -Fud
1833Treat all undocumented instructions as errors.
1834@item -forbid-unportable-instructions
1835@itemx -Fup
1836Treat undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800 as errors.
1837@end table
1838@end ifset
1839
1840@c man end
1841
1842@menu
1843* Manual:: Structure of this Manual
1844* GNU Assembler:: The GNU Assembler
1845* Object Formats:: Object File Formats
1846* Command Line:: Command Line
1847* Input Files:: Input Files
1848* Object:: Output (Object) File
1849* Errors:: Error and Warning Messages
1850@end menu
1851
1852@node Manual
1853@section Structure of this Manual
1854
1855@cindex manual, structure and purpose
1856This manual is intended to describe what you need to know to use
1857@sc{gnu} @command{@value{AS}}. We cover the syntax expected in source files, including
1858notation for symbols, constants, and expressions; the directives that
1859@command{@value{AS}} understands; and of course how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}.
1860
1861@ifclear GENERIC
1862We also cover special features in the @value{TARGET}
1863configuration of @command{@value{AS}}, including assembler directives.
1864@end ifclear
1865@ifset GENERIC
1866This manual also describes some of the machine-dependent features of
1867various flavors of the assembler.
1868@end ifset
1869
1870@cindex machine instructions (not covered)
1871On the other hand, this manual is @emph{not} intended as an introduction
1872to programming in assembly language---let alone programming in general!
1873In a similar vein, we make no attempt to introduce the machine
1874architecture; we do @emph{not} describe the instruction set, standard
1875mnemonics, registers or addressing modes that are standard to a
1876particular architecture.
1877@ifset GENERIC
1878You may want to consult the manufacturer's
1879machine architecture manual for this information.
1880@end ifset
1881@ifclear GENERIC
1882@ifset H8/300
1883For information on the H8/300 machine instruction set, see @cite{H8/300
1884Series Programming Manual}. For the H8/300H, see @cite{H8/300H Series
1885Programming Manual} (Renesas).
1886@end ifset
1887@ifset SH
1888For information on the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) / SuperH SH machine instruction set,
1889see @cite{SH-Microcomputer User's Manual} (Renesas) or
1890@cite{SH-4 32-bit CPU Core Architecture} (SuperH) and
1891@cite{SuperH (SH) 64-Bit RISC Series} (SuperH).
1892@end ifset
1893@ifset Z8000
1894For information on the Z8000 machine instruction set, see @cite{Z8000 CPU Technical Manual}
1895@end ifset
1896@end ifclear
1897
1898@c I think this is premature---doc@cygnus.com, 17jan1991
1899@ignore
1900Throughout this manual, we assume that you are running @dfn{GNU},
1901the portable operating system from the @dfn{Free Software
1902Foundation, Inc.}. This restricts our attention to certain kinds of
1903computer (in particular, the kinds of computers that @sc{gnu} can run on);
1904once this assumption is granted examples and definitions need less
1905qualification.
1906
1907@command{@value{AS}} is part of a team of programs that turn a high-level
1908human-readable series of instructions into a low-level
1909computer-readable series of instructions. Different versions of
1910@command{@value{AS}} are used for different kinds of computer.
1911@end ignore
1912
1913@c There used to be a section "Terminology" here, which defined
1914@c "contents", "byte", "word", and "long". Defining "word" to any
1915@c particular size is confusing when the .word directive may generate 16
1916@c bits on one machine and 32 bits on another; in general, for the user
1917@c version of this manual, none of these terms seem essential to define.
1918@c They were used very little even in the former draft of the manual;
1919@c this draft makes an effort to avoid them (except in names of
1920@c directives).
1921
1922@node GNU Assembler
1923@section The GNU Assembler
1924
1925@c man begin DESCRIPTION
1926
1927@sc{gnu} @command{as} is really a family of assemblers.
1928@ifclear GENERIC
1929This manual describes @command{@value{AS}}, a member of that family which is
1930configured for the @value{TARGET} architectures.
1931@end ifclear
1932If you use (or have used) the @sc{gnu} assembler on one architecture, you
1933should find a fairly similar environment when you use it on another
1934architecture. Each version has much in common with the others,
1935including object file formats, most assembler directives (often called
1936@dfn{pseudo-ops}) and assembler syntax.@refill
1937
1938@cindex purpose of @sc{gnu} assembler
1939@command{@value{AS}} is primarily intended to assemble the output of the
1940@sc{gnu} C compiler @code{@value{GCC}} for use by the linker
1941@code{@value{LD}}. Nevertheless, we've tried to make @command{@value{AS}}
1942assemble correctly everything that other assemblers for the same
1943machine would assemble.
1944@ifset VAX
1945Any exceptions are documented explicitly (@pxref{Machine Dependencies}).
1946@end ifset
1947@ifset M680X0
1948@c This remark should appear in generic version of manual; assumption
1949@c here is that generic version sets M680x0.
1950This doesn't mean @command{@value{AS}} always uses the same syntax as another
1951assembler for the same architecture; for example, we know of several
1952incompatible versions of 680x0 assembly language syntax.
1953@end ifset
1954
1955@c man end
1956
1957Unlike older assemblers, @command{@value{AS}} is designed to assemble a source
1958program in one pass of the source file. This has a subtle impact on the
1959@kbd{.org} directive (@pxref{Org,,@code{.org}}).
1960
1961@node Object Formats
1962@section Object File Formats
1963
1964@cindex object file format
1965The @sc{gnu} assembler can be configured to produce several alternative
1966object file formats. For the most part, this does not affect how you
1967write assembly language programs; but directives for debugging symbols
1968are typically different in different file formats. @xref{Symbol
1969Attributes,,Symbol Attributes}.
1970@ifclear GENERIC
1971@ifclear MULTI-OBJ
1972For the @value{TARGET} target, @command{@value{AS}} is configured to produce
1973@value{OBJ-NAME} format object files.
1974@end ifclear
1975@c The following should exhaust all configs that set MULTI-OBJ, ideally
1976@ifset I960
1977On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1978@code{b.out} or COFF format object files.
1979@end ifset
1980@ifset HPPA
1981On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1982SOM or ELF format object files.
1983@end ifset
1984@end ifclear
1985
1986@node Command Line
1987@section Command Line
1988
1989@cindex command line conventions
1990
1991After the program name @command{@value{AS}}, the command line may contain
1992options and file names. Options may appear in any order, and may be
1993before, after, or between file names. The order of file names is
1994significant.
1995
1996@cindex standard input, as input file
1997@kindex --
1998@file{--} (two hyphens) by itself names the standard input file
1999explicitly, as one of the files for @command{@value{AS}} to assemble.
2000
2001@cindex options, command line
2002Except for @samp{--} any command line argument that begins with a
2003hyphen (@samp{-}) is an option. Each option changes the behavior of
2004@command{@value{AS}}. No option changes the way another option works. An
2005option is a @samp{-} followed by one or more letters; the case of
2006the letter is important. All options are optional.
2007
2008Some options expect exactly one file name to follow them. The file
2009name may either immediately follow the option's letter (compatible
2010with older assemblers) or it may be the next command argument (@sc{gnu}
2011standard). These two command lines are equivalent:
2012
2013@smallexample
2014@value{AS} -o my-object-file.o mumble.s
2015@value{AS} -omy-object-file.o mumble.s
2016@end smallexample
2017
2018@node Input Files
2019@section Input Files
2020
2021@cindex input
2022@cindex source program
2023@cindex files, input
2024We use the phrase @dfn{source program}, abbreviated @dfn{source}, to
2025describe the program input to one run of @command{@value{AS}}. The program may
2026be in one or more files; how the source is partitioned into files
2027doesn't change the meaning of the source.
2028
2029@c I added "con" prefix to "catenation" just to prove I can overcome my
2030@c APL training... doc@cygnus.com
2031The source program is a concatenation of the text in all the files, in the
2032order specified.
2033
2034@c man begin DESCRIPTION
2035Each time you run @command{@value{AS}} it assembles exactly one source
2036program. The source program is made up of one or more files.
2037(The standard input is also a file.)
2038
2039You give @command{@value{AS}} a command line that has zero or more input file
2040names. The input files are read (from left file name to right). A
2041command line argument (in any position) that has no special meaning
2042is taken to be an input file name.
2043
2044If you give @command{@value{AS}} no file names it attempts to read one input file
2045from the @command{@value{AS}} standard input, which is normally your terminal. You
2046may have to type @key{ctl-D} to tell @command{@value{AS}} there is no more program
2047to assemble.
2048
2049Use @samp{--} if you need to explicitly name the standard input file
2050in your command line.
2051
2052If the source is empty, @command{@value{AS}} produces a small, empty object
2053file.
2054
2055@c man end
2056
2057@subheading Filenames and Line-numbers
2058
2059@cindex input file linenumbers
2060@cindex line numbers, in input files
2061There are two ways of locating a line in the input file (or files) and
2062either may be used in reporting error messages. One way refers to a line
2063number in a physical file; the other refers to a line number in a
2064``logical'' file. @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
2065
2066@dfn{Physical files} are those files named in the command line given
2067to @command{@value{AS}}.
2068
2069@dfn{Logical files} are simply names declared explicitly by assembler
2070directives; they bear no relation to physical files. Logical file names help
2071error messages reflect the original source file, when @command{@value{AS}} source
2072is itself synthesized from other files. @command{@value{AS}} understands the
2073@samp{#} directives emitted by the @code{@value{GCC}} preprocessor. See also
2074@ref{File,,@code{.file}}.
2075
2076@node Object
2077@section Output (Object) File
2078
2079@cindex object file
2080@cindex output file
2081@kindex a.out
2082@kindex .o
2083Every time you run @command{@value{AS}} it produces an output file, which is
2084your assembly language program translated into numbers. This file
2085is the object file. Its default name is
2086@ifclear BOUT
2087@code{a.out}.
2088@end ifclear
2089@ifset BOUT
2090@ifset GENERIC
2091@code{a.out}, or
2092@end ifset
2093@code{b.out} when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for the Intel 80960.
2094@end ifset
2095You can give it another name by using the @option{-o} option. Conventionally,
2096object file names end with @file{.o}. The default name is used for historical
2097reasons: older assemblers were capable of assembling self-contained programs
2098directly into a runnable program. (For some formats, this isn't currently
2099possible, but it can be done for the @code{a.out} format.)
2100
2101@cindex linker
2102@kindex ld
2103The object file is meant for input to the linker @code{@value{LD}}. It contains
2104assembled program code, information to help @code{@value{LD}} integrate
2105the assembled program into a runnable file, and (optionally) symbolic
2106information for the debugger.
2107
2108@c link above to some info file(s) like the description of a.out.
2109@c don't forget to describe @sc{gnu} info as well as Unix lossage.
2110
2111@node Errors
2112@section Error and Warning Messages
2113
2114@c man begin DESCRIPTION
2115
2116@cindex error messages
2117@cindex warning messages
2118@cindex messages from assembler
2119@command{@value{AS}} may write warnings and error messages to the standard error
2120file (usually your terminal). This should not happen when a compiler
2121runs @command{@value{AS}} automatically. Warnings report an assumption made so
2122that @command{@value{AS}} could keep assembling a flawed program; errors report a
2123grave problem that stops the assembly.
2124
2125@c man end
2126
2127@cindex format of warning messages
2128Warning messages have the format
2129
2130@smallexample
2131file_name:@b{NNN}:Warning Message Text
2132@end smallexample
2133
2134@noindent
2135@cindex file names and line numbers, in warnings/errors
2136(where @b{NNN} is a line number). If both a logical file name
2137(@pxref{File,,@code{.file}}) and a logical line number
2138@ifset GENERIC
2139(@pxref{Line,,@code{.line}})
2140@end ifset
2141have been given then they will be used, otherwise the file name and line number
2142in the current assembler source file will be used. The message text is
2143intended to be self explanatory (in the grand Unix tradition).
2144
2145Note the file name must be set via the logical version of the @code{.file}
2146directive, not the DWARF2 version of the @code{.file} directive. For example:
2147
2148@smallexample
2149 .file 2 "bar.c"
2150 error_assembler_source
2151 .file "foo.c"
2152 .line 30
2153 error_c_source
2154@end smallexample
2155
2156produces this output:
2157
2158@smallexample
2159 Assembler messages:
2160 asm.s:2: Error: no such instruction: `error_assembler_source'
2161 foo.c:31: Error: no such instruction: `error_c_source'
2162@end smallexample
2163
2164@cindex format of error messages
2165Error messages have the format
2166
2167@smallexample
2168file_name:@b{NNN}:FATAL:Error Message Text
2169@end smallexample
2170
2171The file name and line number are derived as for warning
2172messages. The actual message text may be rather less explanatory
2173because many of them aren't supposed to happen.
2174
2175@node Invoking
2176@chapter Command-Line Options
2177
2178@cindex options, all versions of assembler
2179This chapter describes command-line options available in @emph{all}
2180versions of the @sc{gnu} assembler; see @ref{Machine Dependencies},
2181for options specific
2182@ifclear GENERIC
2183to the @value{TARGET} target.
2184@end ifclear
2185@ifset GENERIC
2186to particular machine architectures.
2187@end ifset
2188
2189@c man begin DESCRIPTION
2190
2191If you are invoking @command{@value{AS}} via the @sc{gnu} C compiler,
2192you can use the @samp{-Wa} option to pass arguments through to the assembler.
2193The assembler arguments must be separated from each other (and the @samp{-Wa})
2194by commas. For example:
2195
2196@smallexample
2197gcc -c -g -O -Wa,-alh,-L file.c
2198@end smallexample
2199
2200@noindent
2201This passes two options to the assembler: @samp{-alh} (emit a listing to
2202standard output with high-level and assembly source) and @samp{-L} (retain
2203local symbols in the symbol table).
2204
2205Usually you do not need to use this @samp{-Wa} mechanism, since many compiler
2206command-line options are automatically passed to the assembler by the compiler.
2207(You can call the @sc{gnu} compiler driver with the @samp{-v} option to see
2208precisely what options it passes to each compilation pass, including the
2209assembler.)
2210
2211@c man end
2212
2213@menu
2214* a:: -a[cdghlns] enable listings
2215* alternate:: --alternate enable alternate macro syntax
2216* D:: -D for compatibility
2217* f:: -f to work faster
2218* I:: -I for .include search path
2219@ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2220* K:: -K for compatibility
2221@end ifclear
2222@ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2223* K:: -K for difference tables
2224@end ifset
2225
2226* L:: -L to retain local symbols
2227* listing:: --listing-XXX to configure listing output
2228* M:: -M or --mri to assemble in MRI compatibility mode
2229* MD:: --MD for dependency tracking
2230* no-pad-sections:: --no-pad-sections to stop section padding
2231* o:: -o to name the object file
2232* R:: -R to join data and text sections
2233* statistics:: --statistics to see statistics about assembly
2234* traditional-format:: --traditional-format for compatible output
2235* v:: -v to announce version
2236* W:: -W, --no-warn, --warn, --fatal-warnings to control warnings
2237* Z:: -Z to make object file even after errors
2238@end menu
2239
2240@node a
2241@section Enable Listings: @option{-a[cdghlns]}
2242
2243@kindex -a
2244@kindex -ac
2245@kindex -ad
2246@kindex -ag
2247@kindex -ah
2248@kindex -al
2249@kindex -an
2250@kindex -as
2251@cindex listings, enabling
2252@cindex assembly listings, enabling
2253
2254These options enable listing output from the assembler. By itself,
2255@samp{-a} requests high-level, assembly, and symbols listing.
2256You can use other letters to select specific options for the list:
2257@samp{-ah} requests a high-level language listing,
2258@samp{-al} requests an output-program assembly listing, and
2259@samp{-as} requests a symbol table listing.
2260High-level listings require that a compiler debugging option like
2261@samp{-g} be used, and that assembly listings (@samp{-al}) be requested
2262also.
2263
2264Use the @samp{-ag} option to print a first section with general assembly
2265information, like @value{AS} version, switches passed, or time stamp.
2266
2267Use the @samp{-ac} option to omit false conditionals from a listing. Any lines
2268which are not assembled because of a false @code{.if} (or @code{.ifdef}, or any
2269other conditional), or a true @code{.if} followed by an @code{.else}, will be
2270omitted from the listing.
2271
2272Use the @samp{-ad} option to omit debugging directives from the
2273listing.
2274
2275Once you have specified one of these options, you can further control
2276listing output and its appearance using the directives @code{.list},
2277@code{.nolist}, @code{.psize}, @code{.eject}, @code{.title}, and
2278@code{.sbttl}.
2279The @samp{-an} option turns off all forms processing.
2280If you do not request listing output with one of the @samp{-a} options, the
2281listing-control directives have no effect.
2282
2283The letters after @samp{-a} may be combined into one option,
2284@emph{e.g.}, @samp{-aln}.
2285
2286Note if the assembler source is coming from the standard input (e.g.,
2287because it
2288is being created by @code{@value{GCC}} and the @samp{-pipe} command line switch
2289is being used) then the listing will not contain any comments or preprocessor
2290directives. This is because the listing code buffers input source lines from
2291stdin only after they have been preprocessed by the assembler. This reduces
2292memory usage and makes the code more efficient.
2293
2294@node alternate
2295@section @option{--alternate}
2296
2297@kindex --alternate
2298Begin in alternate macro mode, see @ref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
2299
2300@node D
2301@section @option{-D}
2302
2303@kindex -D
2304This option has no effect whatsoever, but it is accepted to make it more
2305likely that scripts written for other assemblers also work with
2306@command{@value{AS}}.
2307
2308@node f
2309@section Work Faster: @option{-f}
2310
2311@kindex -f
2312@cindex trusted compiler
2313@cindex faster processing (@option{-f})
2314@samp{-f} should only be used when assembling programs written by a
2315(trusted) compiler. @samp{-f} stops the assembler from doing whitespace
2316and comment preprocessing on
2317the input file(s) before assembling them. @xref{Preprocessing,
2318,Preprocessing}.
2319
2320@quotation
2321@emph{Warning:} if you use @samp{-f} when the files actually need to be
2322preprocessed (if they contain comments, for example), @command{@value{AS}} does
2323not work correctly.
2324@end quotation
2325
2326@node I
2327@section @code{.include} Search Path: @option{-I} @var{path}
2328
2329@kindex -I @var{path}
2330@cindex paths for @code{.include}
2331@cindex search path for @code{.include}
2332@cindex @code{include} directive search path
2333Use this option to add a @var{path} to the list of directories
2334@command{@value{AS}} searches for files specified in @code{.include}
2335directives (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You may use @option{-I} as
2336many times as necessary to include a variety of paths. The current
2337working directory is always searched first; after that, @command{@value{AS}}
2338searches any @samp{-I} directories in the same order as they were
2339specified (left to right) on the command line.
2340
2341@node K
2342@section Difference Tables: @option{-K}
2343
2344@kindex -K
2345@ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2346On the @value{TARGET} family, this option is allowed, but has no effect. It is
2347permitted for compatibility with the @sc{gnu} assembler on other platforms,
2348where it can be used to warn when the assembler alters the machine code
2349generated for @samp{.word} directives in difference tables. The @value{TARGET}
2350family does not have the addressing limitations that sometimes lead to this
2351alteration on other platforms.
2352@end ifclear
2353
2354@ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2355@cindex difference tables, warning
2356@cindex warning for altered difference tables
2357@command{@value{AS}} sometimes alters the code emitted for directives of the
2358form @samp{.word @var{sym1}-@var{sym2}}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
2359You can use the @samp{-K} option if you want a warning issued when this
2360is done.
2361@end ifset
2362
2363@node L
2364@section Include Local Symbols: @option{-L}
2365
2366@kindex -L
2367@cindex local symbols, retaining in output
2368Symbols beginning with system-specific local label prefixes, typically
2369@samp{.L} for ELF systems or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, are
2370called @dfn{local symbols}. @xref{Symbol Names}. Normally you do not see
2371such symbols when debugging, because they are intended for the use of
2372programs (like compilers) that compose assembler programs, not for your
2373notice. Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} discard
2374such symbols, so you do not normally debug with them.
2375
2376This option tells @command{@value{AS}} to retain those local symbols
2377in the object file. Usually if you do this you also tell the linker
2378@code{@value{LD}} to preserve those symbols.
2379
2380@node listing
2381@section Configuring listing output: @option{--listing}
2382
2383The listing feature of the assembler can be enabled via the command line switch
2384@samp{-a} (@pxref{a}). This feature combines the input source file(s) with a
2385hex dump of the corresponding locations in the output object file, and displays
2386them as a listing file. The format of this listing can be controlled by
2387directives inside the assembler source (i.e., @code{.list} (@pxref{List}),
2388@code{.title} (@pxref{Title}), @code{.sbttl} (@pxref{Sbttl}),
2389@code{.psize} (@pxref{Psize}), and
2390@code{.eject} (@pxref{Eject}) and also by the following switches:
2391
2392@table @gcctabopt
2393@item --listing-lhs-width=@samp{number}
2394@kindex --listing-lhs-width
2395@cindex Width of first line disassembly output
2396Sets the maximum width, in words, of the first line of the hex byte dump. This
2397dump appears on the left hand side of the listing output.
2398
2399@item --listing-lhs-width2=@samp{number}
2400@kindex --listing-lhs-width2
2401@cindex Width of continuation lines of disassembly output
2402Sets the maximum width, in words, of any further lines of the hex byte dump for
2403a given input source line. If this value is not specified, it defaults to being
2404the same as the value specified for @samp{--listing-lhs-width}. If neither
2405switch is used the default is to one.
2406
2407@item --listing-rhs-width=@samp{number}
2408@kindex --listing-rhs-width
2409@cindex Width of source line output
2410Sets the maximum width, in characters, of the source line that is displayed
2411alongside the hex dump. The default value for this parameter is 100. The
2412source line is displayed on the right hand side of the listing output.
2413
2414@item --listing-cont-lines=@samp{number}
2415@kindex --listing-cont-lines
2416@cindex Maximum number of continuation lines
2417Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex dump that will be
2418displayed for a given single line of source input. The default value is 4.
2419@end table
2420
2421@node M
2422@section Assemble in MRI Compatibility Mode: @option{-M}
2423
2424@kindex -M
2425@cindex MRI compatibility mode
2426The @option{-M} or @option{--mri} option selects MRI compatibility mode. This
2427changes the syntax and pseudo-op handling of @command{@value{AS}} to make it
2428compatible with the @code{ASM68K} or the @code{ASM960} (depending upon the
2429configured target) assembler from Microtec Research. The exact nature of the
2430MRI syntax will not be documented here; see the MRI manuals for more
2431information. Note in particular that the handling of macros and macro
2432arguments is somewhat different. The purpose of this option is to permit
2433assembling existing MRI assembler code using @command{@value{AS}}.
2434
2435The MRI compatibility is not complete. Certain operations of the MRI assembler
2436depend upon its object file format, and can not be supported using other object
2437file formats. Supporting these would require enhancing each object file format
2438individually. These are:
2439
2440@itemize @bullet
2441@item global symbols in common section
2442
2443The m68k MRI assembler supports common sections which are merged by the linker.
2444Other object file formats do not support this. @command{@value{AS}} handles
2445common sections by treating them as a single common symbol. It permits local
2446symbols to be defined within a common section, but it can not support global
2447symbols, since it has no way to describe them.
2448
2449@item complex relocations
2450
2451The MRI assemblers support relocations against a negated section address, and
2452relocations which combine the start addresses of two or more sections. These
2453are not support by other object file formats.
2454
2455@item @code{END} pseudo-op specifying start address
2456
2457The MRI @code{END} pseudo-op permits the specification of a start address.
2458This is not supported by other object file formats. The start address may
2459instead be specified using the @option{-e} option to the linker, or in a linker
2460script.
2461
2462@item @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops
2463
2464The MRI @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops assign a module
2465name to the output file. This is not supported by other object file formats.
2466
2467@item @code{ORG} pseudo-op
2468
2469The m68k MRI @code{ORG} pseudo-op begins an absolute section at a given
2470address. This differs from the usual @command{@value{AS}} @code{.org} pseudo-op,
2471which changes the location within the current section. Absolute sections are
2472not supported by other object file formats. The address of a section may be
2473assigned within a linker script.
2474@end itemize
2475
2476There are some other features of the MRI assembler which are not supported by
2477@command{@value{AS}}, typically either because they are difficult or because they
2478seem of little consequence. Some of these may be supported in future releases.
2479
2480@itemize @bullet
2481
2482@item EBCDIC strings
2483
2484EBCDIC strings are not supported.
2485
2486@item packed binary coded decimal
2487
2488Packed binary coded decimal is not supported. This means that the @code{DC.P}
2489and @code{DCB.P} pseudo-ops are not supported.
2490
2491@item @code{FEQU} pseudo-op
2492
2493The m68k @code{FEQU} pseudo-op is not supported.
2494
2495@item @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op
2496
2497The m68k @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op is not supported.
2498
2499@item @code{OPT} branch control options
2500
2501The m68k @code{OPT} branch control options---@code{B}, @code{BRS}, @code{BRB},
2502@code{BRL}, and @code{BRW}---are ignored. @command{@value{AS}} automatically
2503relaxes all branches, whether forward or backward, to an appropriate size, so
2504these options serve no purpose.
2505
2506@item @code{OPT} list control options
2507
2508The following m68k @code{OPT} list control options are ignored: @code{C},
2509@code{CEX}, @code{CL}, @code{CRE}, @code{E}, @code{G}, @code{I}, @code{M},
2510@code{MEX}, @code{MC}, @code{MD}, @code{X}.
2511
2512@item other @code{OPT} options
2513
2514The following m68k @code{OPT} options are ignored: @code{NEST}, @code{O},
2515@code{OLD}, @code{OP}, @code{P}, @code{PCO}, @code{PCR}, @code{PCS}, @code{R}.
2516
2517@item @code{OPT} @code{D} option is default
2518
2519The m68k @code{OPT} @code{D} option is the default, unlike the MRI assembler.
2520@code{OPT NOD} may be used to turn it off.
2521
2522@item @code{XREF} pseudo-op.
2523
2524The m68k @code{XREF} pseudo-op is ignored.
2525
2526@item @code{.debug} pseudo-op
2527
2528The i960 @code{.debug} pseudo-op is not supported.
2529
2530@item @code{.extended} pseudo-op
2531
2532The i960 @code{.extended} pseudo-op is not supported.
2533
2534@item @code{.list} pseudo-op.
2535
2536The various options of the i960 @code{.list} pseudo-op are not supported.
2537
2538@item @code{.optimize} pseudo-op
2539
2540The i960 @code{.optimize} pseudo-op is not supported.
2541
2542@item @code{.output} pseudo-op
2543
2544The i960 @code{.output} pseudo-op is not supported.
2545
2546@item @code{.setreal} pseudo-op
2547
2548The i960 @code{.setreal} pseudo-op is not supported.
2549
2550@end itemize
2551
2552@node MD
2553@section Dependency Tracking: @option{--MD}
2554
2555@kindex --MD
2556@cindex dependency tracking
2557@cindex make rules
2558
2559@command{@value{AS}} can generate a dependency file for the file it creates. This
2560file consists of a single rule suitable for @code{make} describing the
2561dependencies of the main source file.
2562
2563The rule is written to the file named in its argument.
2564
2565This feature is used in the automatic updating of makefiles.
2566
2567@node no-pad-sections
2568@section Output Section Padding
2569@kindex --no-pad-sections
2570@cindex output section padding
2571Normally the assembler will pad the end of each output section up to its
2572alignment boundary. But this can waste space, which can be significant on
2573memory constrained targets. So the @option{--no-pad-sections} option will
2574disable this behaviour.
2575
2576@node o
2577@section Name the Object File: @option{-o}
2578
2579@kindex -o
2580@cindex naming object file
2581@cindex object file name
2582There is always one object file output when you run @command{@value{AS}}. By
2583default it has the name
2584@ifset GENERIC
2585@ifset I960
2586@file{a.out} (or @file{b.out}, for Intel 960 targets only).
2587@end ifset
2588@ifclear I960
2589@file{a.out}.
2590@end ifclear
2591@end ifset
2592@ifclear GENERIC
2593@ifset I960
2594@file{b.out}.
2595@end ifset
2596@ifclear I960
2597@file{a.out}.
2598@end ifclear
2599@end ifclear
2600You use this option (which takes exactly one filename) to give the
2601object file a different name.
2602
2603Whatever the object file is called, @command{@value{AS}} overwrites any
2604existing file of the same name.
2605
2606@node R
2607@section Join Data and Text Sections: @option{-R}
2608
2609@kindex -R
2610@cindex data and text sections, joining
2611@cindex text and data sections, joining
2612@cindex joining text and data sections
2613@cindex merging text and data sections
2614@option{-R} tells @command{@value{AS}} to write the object file as if all
2615data-section data lives in the text section. This is only done at
2616the very last moment: your binary data are the same, but data
2617section parts are relocated differently. The data section part of
2618your object file is zero bytes long because all its bytes are
2619appended to the text section. (@xref{Sections,,Sections and Relocation}.)
2620
2621When you specify @option{-R} it would be possible to generate shorter
2622address displacements (because we do not have to cross between text and
2623data section). We refrain from doing this simply for compatibility with
2624older versions of @command{@value{AS}}. In future, @option{-R} may work this way.
2625
2626@ifset COFF-ELF
2627When @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF or ELF output,
2628this option is only useful if you use sections named @samp{.text} and
2629@samp{.data}.
2630@end ifset
2631
2632@ifset HPPA
2633@option{-R} is not supported for any of the HPPA targets. Using
2634@option{-R} generates a warning from @command{@value{AS}}.
2635@end ifset
2636
2637@node statistics
2638@section Display Assembly Statistics: @option{--statistics}
2639
2640@kindex --statistics
2641@cindex statistics, about assembly
2642@cindex time, total for assembly
2643@cindex space used, maximum for assembly
2644Use @samp{--statistics} to display two statistics about the resources used by
2645@command{@value{AS}}: the maximum amount of space allocated during the assembly
2646(in bytes), and the total execution time taken for the assembly (in @sc{cpu}
2647seconds).
2648
2649@node traditional-format
2650@section Compatible Output: @option{--traditional-format}
2651
2652@kindex --traditional-format
2653For some targets, the output of @command{@value{AS}} is different in some ways
2654from the output of some existing assembler. This switch requests
2655@command{@value{AS}} to use the traditional format instead.
2656
2657For example, it disables the exception frame optimizations which
2658@command{@value{AS}} normally does by default on @code{@value{GCC}} output.
2659
2660@node v
2661@section Announce Version: @option{-v}
2662
2663@kindex -v
2664@kindex -version
2665@cindex assembler version
2666@cindex version of assembler
2667You can find out what version of as is running by including the
2668option @samp{-v} (which you can also spell as @samp{-version}) on the
2669command line.
2670
2671@node W
2672@section Control Warnings: @option{-W}, @option{--warn}, @option{--no-warn}, @option{--fatal-warnings}
2673
2674@command{@value{AS}} should never give a warning or error message when
2675assembling compiler output. But programs written by people often
2676cause @command{@value{AS}} to give a warning that a particular assumption was
2677made. All such warnings are directed to the standard error file.
2678
2679@kindex -W
2680@kindex --no-warn
2681@cindex suppressing warnings
2682@cindex warnings, suppressing
2683If you use the @option{-W} and @option{--no-warn} options, no warnings are issued.
2684This only affects the warning messages: it does not change any particular of
2685how @command{@value{AS}} assembles your file. Errors, which stop the assembly,
2686are still reported.
2687
2688@kindex --fatal-warnings
2689@cindex errors, caused by warnings
2690@cindex warnings, causing error
2691If you use the @option{--fatal-warnings} option, @command{@value{AS}} considers
2692files that generate warnings to be in error.
2693
2694@kindex --warn
2695@cindex warnings, switching on
2696You can switch these options off again by specifying @option{--warn}, which
2697causes warnings to be output as usual.
2698
2699@node Z
2700@section Generate Object File in Spite of Errors: @option{-Z}
2701@cindex object file, after errors
2702@cindex errors, continuing after
2703After an error message, @command{@value{AS}} normally produces no output. If for
2704some reason you are interested in object file output even after
2705@command{@value{AS}} gives an error message on your program, use the @samp{-Z}
2706option. If there are any errors, @command{@value{AS}} continues anyways, and
2707writes an object file after a final warning message of the form @samp{@var{n}
2708errors, @var{m} warnings, generating bad object file.}
2709
2710@node Syntax
2711@chapter Syntax
2712
2713@cindex machine-independent syntax
2714@cindex syntax, machine-independent
2715This chapter describes the machine-independent syntax allowed in a
2716source file. @command{@value{AS}} syntax is similar to what many other
2717assemblers use; it is inspired by the BSD 4.2
2718@ifclear VAX
2719assembler.
2720@end ifclear
2721@ifset VAX
2722assembler, except that @command{@value{AS}} does not assemble Vax bit-fields.
2723@end ifset
2724
2725@menu
2726* Preprocessing:: Preprocessing
2727* Whitespace:: Whitespace
2728* Comments:: Comments
2729* Symbol Intro:: Symbols
2730* Statements:: Statements
2731* Constants:: Constants
2732@end menu
2733
2734@node Preprocessing
2735@section Preprocessing
2736
2737@cindex preprocessing
2738The @command{@value{AS}} internal preprocessor:
2739@itemize @bullet
2740@cindex whitespace, removed by preprocessor
2741@item
2742adjusts and removes extra whitespace. It leaves one space or tab before
2743the keywords on a line, and turns any other whitespace on the line into
2744a single space.
2745
2746@cindex comments, removed by preprocessor
2747@item
2748removes all comments, replacing them with a single space, or an
2749appropriate number of newlines.
2750
2751@cindex constants, converted by preprocessor
2752@item
2753converts character constants into the appropriate numeric values.
2754@end itemize
2755
2756It does not do macro processing, include file handling, or
2757anything else you may get from your C compiler's preprocessor. You can
2758do include file processing with the @code{.include} directive
2759(@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You can use the @sc{gnu} C compiler driver
2760to get other ``CPP'' style preprocessing by giving the input file a
2761@samp{.S} suffix. @xref{Overall Options, ,Options Controlling the Kind of
2762Output, gcc info, Using GNU CC}.
2763
2764Excess whitespace, comments, and character constants
2765cannot be used in the portions of the input text that are not
2766preprocessed.
2767
2768@cindex turning preprocessing on and off
2769@cindex preprocessing, turning on and off
2770@kindex #NO_APP
2771@kindex #APP
2772If the first line of an input file is @code{#NO_APP} or if you use the
2773@samp{-f} option, whitespace and comments are not removed from the input file.
2774Within an input file, you can ask for whitespace and comment removal in
2775specific portions of the by putting a line that says @code{#APP} before the
2776text that may contain whitespace or comments, and putting a line that says
2777@code{#NO_APP} after this text. This feature is mainly intend to support
2778@code{asm} statements in compilers whose output is otherwise free of comments
2779and whitespace.
2780
2781@node Whitespace
2782@section Whitespace
2783
2784@cindex whitespace
2785@dfn{Whitespace} is one or more blanks or tabs, in any order.
2786Whitespace is used to separate symbols, and to make programs neater for
2787people to read. Unless within character constants
2788(@pxref{Characters,,Character Constants}), any whitespace means the same
2789as exactly one space.
2790
2791@node Comments
2792@section Comments
2793
2794@cindex comments
2795There are two ways of rendering comments to @command{@value{AS}}. In both
2796cases the comment is equivalent to one space.
2797
2798Anything from @samp{/*} through the next @samp{*/} is a comment.
2799This means you may not nest these comments.
2800
2801@smallexample
2802/*
2803 The only way to include a newline ('\n') in a comment
2804 is to use this sort of comment.
2805*/
2806
2807/* This sort of comment does not nest. */
2808@end smallexample
2809
2810@cindex line comment character
2811Anything from a @dfn{line comment} character up to the next newline is
2812considered a comment and is ignored. The line comment character is target
2813specific, and some targets multiple comment characters. Some targets also have
2814line comment characters that only work if they are the first character on a
2815line. Some targets use a sequence of two characters to introduce a line
2816comment. Some targets can also change their line comment characters depending
2817upon command line options that have been used. For more details see the
2818@emph{Syntax} section in the documentation for individual targets.
2819
2820If the line comment character is the hash sign (@samp{#}) then it still has the
2821special ability to enable and disable preprocessing (@pxref{Preprocessing}) and
2822to specify logical line numbers:
2823
2824@kindex #
2825@cindex lines starting with @code{#}
2826@cindex logical line numbers
2827To be compatible with past assemblers, lines that begin with @samp{#} have a
2828special interpretation. Following the @samp{#} should be an absolute
2829expression (@pxref{Expressions}): the logical line number of the @emph{next}
2830line. Then a string (@pxref{Strings, ,Strings}) is allowed: if present it is a
2831new logical file name. The rest of the line, if any, should be whitespace.
2832
2833If the first non-whitespace characters on the line are not numeric,
2834the line is ignored. (Just like a comment.)
2835
2836@smallexample
2837 # This is an ordinary comment.
2838# 42-6 "new_file_name" # New logical file name
2839 # This is logical line # 36.
2840@end smallexample
2841This feature is deprecated, and may disappear from future versions
2842of @command{@value{AS}}.
2843
2844@node Symbol Intro
2845@section Symbols
2846
2847@cindex characters used in symbols
2848@ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
2849A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2850letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2851@samp{_.$}.
2852@end ifclear
2853@ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
2854@ifclear GENERIC
2855@ifset H8
2856A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2857letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2858@samp{._$}. (Save that, on the H8/300 only, you may not use @samp{$} in
2859symbol names.)
2860@end ifset
2861@end ifclear
2862@end ifset
2863@ifset GENERIC
2864On most machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions
2865are noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}.
2866@end ifset
2867No symbol may begin with a digit. Case is significant.
2868There is no length limit; all characters are significant. Multibyte characters
2869are supported. Symbols are delimited by characters not in that set, or by the
2870beginning of a file (since the source program must end with a newline, the end
2871of a file is not a possible symbol delimiter). @xref{Symbols}.
2872
2873Symbol names may also be enclosed in double quote @code{"} characters. In such
2874cases any characters are allowed, except for the NUL character. If a double
2875quote character is to be included in the symbol name it must be preceeded by a
2876backslash @code{\} character.
2877@cindex length of symbols
2878
2879@node Statements
2880@section Statements
2881
2882@cindex statements, structure of
2883@cindex line separator character
2884@cindex statement separator character
2885
2886A @dfn{statement} ends at a newline character (@samp{\n}) or a
2887@dfn{line separator character}. The line separator character is target
2888specific and described in the @emph{Syntax} section of each
2889target's documentation. Not all targets support a line separator character.
2890The newline or line separator character is considered to be part of the
2891preceding statement. Newlines and separators within character constants are an
2892exception: they do not end statements.
2893
2894@cindex newline, required at file end
2895@cindex EOF, newline must precede
2896It is an error to end any statement with end-of-file: the last
2897character of any input file should be a newline.@refill
2898
2899An empty statement is allowed, and may include whitespace. It is ignored.
2900
2901@cindex instructions and directives
2902@cindex directives and instructions
2903@c "key symbol" is not used elsewhere in the document; seems pedantic to
2904@c @defn{} it in that case, as was done previously... doc@cygnus.com,
2905@c 13feb91.
2906A statement begins with zero or more labels, optionally followed by a
2907key symbol which determines what kind of statement it is. The key
2908symbol determines the syntax of the rest of the statement. If the
2909symbol begins with a dot @samp{.} then the statement is an assembler
2910directive: typically valid for any computer. If the symbol begins with
2911a letter the statement is an assembly language @dfn{instruction}: it
2912assembles into a machine language instruction.
2913@ifset GENERIC
2914Different versions of @command{@value{AS}} for different computers
2915recognize different instructions. In fact, the same symbol may
2916represent a different instruction in a different computer's assembly
2917language.@refill
2918@end ifset
2919
2920@cindex @code{:} (label)
2921@cindex label (@code{:})
2922A label is a symbol immediately followed by a colon (@code{:}).
2923Whitespace before a label or after a colon is permitted, but you may not
2924have whitespace between a label's symbol and its colon. @xref{Labels}.
2925
2926@ifset HPPA
2927For HPPA targets, labels need not be immediately followed by a colon, but
2928the definition of a label must begin in column zero. This also implies that
2929only one label may be defined on each line.
2930@end ifset
2931
2932@smallexample
2933label: .directive followed by something
2934another_label: # This is an empty statement.
2935 instruction operand_1, operand_2, @dots{}
2936@end smallexample
2937
2938@node Constants
2939@section Constants
2940
2941@cindex constants
2942A constant is a number, written so that its value is known by
2943inspection, without knowing any context. Like this:
2944@smallexample
2945@group
2946.byte 74, 0112, 092, 0x4A, 0X4a, 'J, '\J # All the same value.
2947.ascii "Ring the bell\7" # A string constant.
2948.octa 0x123456789abcdef0123456789ABCDEF0 # A bignum.
2949.float 0f-314159265358979323846264338327\
295095028841971.693993751E-40 # - pi, a flonum.
2951@end group
2952@end smallexample
2953
2954@menu
2955* Characters:: Character Constants
2956* Numbers:: Number Constants
2957@end menu
2958
2959@node Characters
2960@subsection Character Constants
2961
2962@cindex character constants
2963@cindex constants, character
2964There are two kinds of character constants. A @dfn{character} stands
2965for one character in one byte and its value may be used in
2966numeric expressions. String constants (properly called string
2967@emph{literals}) are potentially many bytes and their values may not be
2968used in arithmetic expressions.
2969
2970@menu
2971* Strings:: Strings
2972* Chars:: Characters
2973@end menu
2974
2975@node Strings
2976@subsubsection Strings
2977
2978@cindex string constants
2979@cindex constants, string
2980A @dfn{string} is written between double-quotes. It may contain
2981double-quotes or null characters. The way to get special characters
2982into a string is to @dfn{escape} these characters: precede them with
2983a backslash @samp{\} character. For example @samp{\\} represents
2984one backslash: the first @code{\} is an escape which tells
2985@command{@value{AS}} to interpret the second character literally as a backslash
2986(which prevents @command{@value{AS}} from recognizing the second @code{\} as an
2987escape character). The complete list of escapes follows.
2988
2989@cindex escape codes, character
2990@cindex character escape codes
2991@c NOTE: Cindex entries must not start with a backlash character.
2992@c NOTE: This confuses the pdf2texi script when it is creating the
2993@c NOTE: index based upon the first character and so it generates:
2994@c NOTE: \initial {\\}
2995@c NOTE: which then results in the error message:
2996@c NOTE: Argument of \\ has an extra }.
2997@c NOTE: So in the index entries below a space character has been
2998@c NOTE: prepended to avoid this problem.
2999@table @kbd
3000@c @item \a
3001@c Mnemonic for ACKnowledge; for ASCII this is octal code 007.
3002@c
3003@cindex @code{ \b} (backspace character)
3004@cindex backspace (@code{\b})
3005@item \b
3006Mnemonic for backspace; for ASCII this is octal code 010.
3007
3008@c @item \e
3009@c Mnemonic for EOText; for ASCII this is octal code 004.
3010@c
3011@cindex @code{ \f} (formfeed character)
3012@cindex formfeed (@code{\f})
3013@item backslash-f
3014Mnemonic for FormFeed; for ASCII this is octal code 014.
3015
3016@cindex @code{ \n} (newline character)
3017@cindex newline (@code{\n})
3018@item \n
3019Mnemonic for newline; for ASCII this is octal code 012.
3020
3021@c @item \p
3022@c Mnemonic for prefix; for ASCII this is octal code 033, usually known as @code{escape}.
3023@c
3024@cindex @code{ \r} (carriage return character)
3025@cindex carriage return (@code{backslash-r})
3026@item \r
3027Mnemonic for carriage-Return; for ASCII this is octal code 015.
3028
3029@c @item \s
3030@c Mnemonic for space; for ASCII this is octal code 040. Included for compliance with
3031@c other assemblers.
3032@c
3033@cindex @code{ \t} (tab)
3034@cindex tab (@code{\t})
3035@item \t
3036Mnemonic for horizontal Tab; for ASCII this is octal code 011.
3037
3038@c @item \v
3039@c Mnemonic for Vertical tab; for ASCII this is octal code 013.
3040@c @item \x @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
3041@c A hexadecimal character code. The numeric code is 3 hexadecimal digits.
3042@c
3043@cindex @code{ \@var{ddd}} (octal character code)
3044@cindex octal character code (@code{\@var{ddd}})
3045@item \ @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
3046An octal character code. The numeric code is 3 octal digits.
3047For compatibility with other Unix systems, 8 and 9 are accepted as digits:
3048for example, @code{\008} has the value 010, and @code{\009} the value 011.
3049
3050@cindex @code{ \@var{xd...}} (hex character code)
3051@cindex hex character code (@code{\@var{xd...}})
3052@item \@code{x} @var{hex-digits...}
3053A hex character code. All trailing hex digits are combined. Either upper or
3054lower case @code{x} works.
3055
3056@cindex @code{ \\} (@samp{\} character)
3057@cindex backslash (@code{\\})
3058@item \\
3059Represents one @samp{\} character.
3060
3061@c @item \'
3062@c Represents one @samp{'} (accent acute) character.
3063@c This is needed in single character literals
3064@c (@xref{Characters,,Character Constants}.) to represent
3065@c a @samp{'}.
3066@c
3067@cindex @code{ \"} (doublequote character)
3068@cindex doublequote (@code{\"})
3069@item \"
3070Represents one @samp{"} character. Needed in strings to represent
3071this character, because an unescaped @samp{"} would end the string.
3072
3073@item \ @var{anything-else}
3074Any other character when escaped by @kbd{\} gives a warning, but
3075assembles as if the @samp{\} was not present. The idea is that if
3076you used an escape sequence you clearly didn't want the literal
3077interpretation of the following character. However @command{@value{AS}} has no
3078other interpretation, so @command{@value{AS}} knows it is giving you the wrong
3079code and warns you of the fact.
3080@end table
3081
3082Which characters are escapable, and what those escapes represent,
3083varies widely among assemblers. The current set is what we think
3084the BSD 4.2 assembler recognizes, and is a subset of what most C
3085compilers recognize. If you are in doubt, do not use an escape
3086sequence.
3087
3088@node Chars
3089@subsubsection Characters
3090
3091@cindex single character constant
3092@cindex character, single
3093@cindex constant, single character
3094A single character may be written as a single quote immediately followed by
3095that character. Some backslash escapes apply to characters, @code{\b},
3096@code{\f}, @code{\n}, @code{\r}, @code{\t}, and @code{\"} with the same meaning
3097as for strings, plus @code{\'} for a single quote. So if you want to write the
3098character backslash, you must write @kbd{'\\} where the first @code{\} escapes
3099the second @code{\}. As you can see, the quote is an acute accent, not a grave
3100accent. A newline
3101@ifclear GENERIC
3102@ifclear abnormal-separator
3103(or semicolon @samp{;})
3104@end ifclear
3105@ifset abnormal-separator
3106@ifset H8
3107(or dollar sign @samp{$}, for the H8/300; or semicolon @samp{;} for the
3108Renesas SH)
3109@end ifset
3110@end ifset
3111@end ifclear
3112immediately following an acute accent is taken as a literal character
3113and does not count as the end of a statement. The value of a character
3114constant in a numeric expression is the machine's byte-wide code for
3115that character. @command{@value{AS}} assumes your character code is ASCII:
3116@kbd{'A} means 65, @kbd{'B} means 66, and so on. @refill
3117
3118@node Numbers
3119@subsection Number Constants
3120
3121@cindex constants, number
3122@cindex number constants
3123@command{@value{AS}} distinguishes three kinds of numbers according to how they
3124are stored in the target machine. @emph{Integers} are numbers that
3125would fit into an @code{int} in the C language. @emph{Bignums} are
3126integers, but they are stored in more than 32 bits. @emph{Flonums}
3127are floating point numbers, described below.
3128
3129@menu
3130* Integers:: Integers
3131* Bignums:: Bignums
3132* Flonums:: Flonums
3133@ifclear GENERIC
3134@ifset I960
3135* Bit Fields:: Bit Fields
3136@end ifset
3137@end ifclear
3138@end menu
3139
3140@node Integers
3141@subsubsection Integers
3142@cindex integers
3143@cindex constants, integer
3144
3145@cindex binary integers
3146@cindex integers, binary
3147A binary integer is @samp{0b} or @samp{0B} followed by zero or more of
3148the binary digits @samp{01}.
3149
3150@cindex octal integers
3151@cindex integers, octal
3152An octal integer is @samp{0} followed by zero or more of the octal
3153digits (@samp{01234567}).
3154
3155@cindex decimal integers
3156@cindex integers, decimal
3157A decimal integer starts with a non-zero digit followed by zero or
3158more digits (@samp{0123456789}).
3159
3160@cindex hexadecimal integers
3161@cindex integers, hexadecimal
3162A hexadecimal integer is @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} followed by one or
3163more hexadecimal digits chosen from @samp{0123456789abcdefABCDEF}.
3164
3165Integers have the usual values. To denote a negative integer, use
3166the prefix operator @samp{-} discussed under expressions
3167(@pxref{Prefix Ops,,Prefix Operators}).
3168
3169@node Bignums
3170@subsubsection Bignums
3171
3172@cindex bignums
3173@cindex constants, bignum
3174A @dfn{bignum} has the same syntax and semantics as an integer
3175except that the number (or its negative) takes more than 32 bits to
3176represent in binary. The distinction is made because in some places
3177integers are permitted while bignums are not.
3178
3179@node Flonums
3180@subsubsection Flonums
3181@cindex flonums
3182@cindex floating point numbers
3183@cindex constants, floating point
3184
3185@cindex precision, floating point
3186A @dfn{flonum} represents a floating point number. The translation is
3187indirect: a decimal floating point number from the text is converted by
3188@command{@value{AS}} to a generic binary floating point number of more than
3189sufficient precision. This generic floating point number is converted
3190to a particular computer's floating point format (or formats) by a
3191portion of @command{@value{AS}} specialized to that computer.
3192
3193A flonum is written by writing (in order)
3194@itemize @bullet
3195@item
3196The digit @samp{0}.
3197@ifset HPPA
3198(@samp{0} is optional on the HPPA.)
3199@end ifset
3200
3201@item
3202A letter, to tell @command{@value{AS}} the rest of the number is a flonum.
3203@ifset GENERIC
3204@kbd{e} is recommended. Case is not important.
3205@ignore
3206@c FIXME: verify if flonum syntax really this vague for most cases
3207(Any otherwise illegal letter works here, but that might be changed. Vax BSD
32084.2 assembler seems to allow any of @samp{defghDEFGH}.)
3209@end ignore
3210
3211On the H8/300, Renesas / SuperH SH,
3212and AMD 29K architectures, the letter must be
3213one of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
3214
3215On the ARC, the letter must be one of the letters @samp{DFRS}
3216(in upper or lower case).
3217
3218On the Intel 960 architecture, the letter must be
3219one of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
3220
3221On the HPPA architecture, the letter must be @samp{E} (upper case only).
3222@end ifset
3223@ifclear GENERIC
3224@ifset ARC
3225One of the letters @samp{DFRS} (in upper or lower case).
3226@end ifset
3227@ifset H8
3228One of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
3229@end ifset
3230@ifset HPPA
3231The letter @samp{E} (upper case only).
3232@end ifset
3233@ifset I960
3234One of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
3235@end ifset
3236@end ifclear
3237
3238@item
3239An optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
3240
3241@item
3242An optional @dfn{integer part}: zero or more decimal digits.
3243
3244@item
3245An optional @dfn{fractional part}: @samp{.} followed by zero
3246or more decimal digits.
3247
3248@item
3249An optional exponent, consisting of:
3250
3251@itemize @bullet
3252@item
3253An @samp{E} or @samp{e}.
3254@c I can't find a config where "EXP_CHARS" is other than 'eE', but in
3255@c principle this can perfectly well be different on different targets.
3256@item
3257Optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
3258@item
3259One or more decimal digits.
3260@end itemize
3261
3262@end itemize
3263
3264At least one of the integer part or the fractional part must be
3265present. The floating point number has the usual base-10 value.
3266
3267@command{@value{AS}} does all processing using integers. Flonums are computed
3268independently of any floating point hardware in the computer running
3269@command{@value{AS}}.
3270
3271@ifclear GENERIC
3272@ifset I960
3273@c Bit fields are written as a general facility but are also controlled
3274@c by a conditional-compilation flag---which is as of now (21mar91)
3275@c turned on only by the i960 config of GAS.
3276@node Bit Fields
3277@subsubsection Bit Fields
3278
3279@cindex bit fields
3280@cindex constants, bit field
3281You can also define numeric constants as @dfn{bit fields}.
3282Specify two numbers separated by a colon---
3283@example
3284@var{mask}:@var{value}
3285@end example
3286@noindent
3287@command{@value{AS}} applies a bitwise @sc{and} between @var{mask} and
3288@var{value}.
3289
3290The resulting number is then packed
3291@ifset GENERIC
3292@c this conditional paren in case bit fields turned on elsewhere than 960
3293(in host-dependent byte order)
3294@end ifset
3295into a field whose width depends on which assembler directive has the
3296bit-field as its argument. Overflow (a result from the bitwise and
3297requiring more binary digits to represent) is not an error; instead,
3298more constants are generated, of the specified width, beginning with the
3299least significant digits.@refill
3300
3301The directives @code{.byte}, @code{.hword}, @code{.int}, @code{.long},
3302@code{.short}, and @code{.word} accept bit-field arguments.
3303@end ifset
3304@end ifclear
3305
3306@node Sections
3307@chapter Sections and Relocation
3308@cindex sections
3309@cindex relocation
3310
3311@menu
3312* Secs Background:: Background
3313* Ld Sections:: Linker Sections
3314* As Sections:: Assembler Internal Sections
3315* Sub-Sections:: Sub-Sections
3316* bss:: bss Section
3317@end menu
3318
3319@node Secs Background
3320@section Background
3321
3322Roughly, a section is a range of addresses, with no gaps; all data
3323``in'' those addresses is treated the same for some particular purpose.
3324For example there may be a ``read only'' section.
3325
3326@cindex linker, and assembler
3327@cindex assembler, and linker
3328The linker @code{@value{LD}} reads many object files (partial programs) and
3329combines their contents to form a runnable program. When @command{@value{AS}}
3330emits an object file, the partial program is assumed to start at address 0.
3331@code{@value{LD}} assigns the final addresses for the partial program, so that
3332different partial programs do not overlap. This is actually an
3333oversimplification, but it suffices to explain how @command{@value{AS}} uses
3334sections.
3335
3336@code{@value{LD}} moves blocks of bytes of your program to their run-time
3337addresses. These blocks slide to their run-time addresses as rigid
3338units; their length does not change and neither does the order of bytes
3339within them. Such a rigid unit is called a @emph{section}. Assigning
3340run-time addresses to sections is called @dfn{relocation}. It includes
3341the task of adjusting mentions of object-file addresses so they refer to
3342the proper run-time addresses.
3343@ifset H8
3344For the H8/300, and for the Renesas / SuperH SH,
3345@command{@value{AS}} pads sections if needed to
3346ensure they end on a word (sixteen bit) boundary.
3347@end ifset
3348
3349@cindex standard assembler sections
3350An object file written by @command{@value{AS}} has at least three sections, any
3351of which may be empty. These are named @dfn{text}, @dfn{data} and
3352@dfn{bss} sections.
3353
3354@ifset COFF-ELF
3355@ifset GENERIC
3356When it generates COFF or ELF output,
3357@end ifset
3358@command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you specify
3359using the @samp{.section} directive (@pxref{Section,,@code{.section}}).
3360If you do not use any directives that place output in the @samp{.text}
3361or @samp{.data} sections, these sections still exist, but are empty.
3362@end ifset
3363
3364@ifset HPPA
3365@ifset GENERIC
3366When @command{@value{AS}} generates SOM or ELF output for the HPPA,
3367@end ifset
3368@command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you
3369specify using the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace} directives. See
3370@cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly Language Reference Manual}
3371(HP 92432-90001) for details on the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace}
3372assembler directives.
3373
3374@ifset SOM
3375Additionally, @command{@value{AS}} uses different names for the standard
3376text, data, and bss sections when generating SOM output. Program text
3377is placed into the @samp{$CODE$} section, data into @samp{$DATA$}, and
3378BSS into @samp{$BSS$}.
3379@end ifset
3380@end ifset
3381
3382Within the object file, the text section starts at address @code{0}, the
3383data section follows, and the bss section follows the data section.
3384
3385@ifset HPPA
3386When generating either SOM or ELF output files on the HPPA, the text
3387section starts at address @code{0}, the data section at address
3388@code{0x4000000}, and the bss section follows the data section.
3389@end ifset
3390
3391To let @code{@value{LD}} know which data changes when the sections are
3392relocated, and how to change that data, @command{@value{AS}} also writes to the
3393object file details of the relocation needed. To perform relocation
3394@code{@value{LD}} must know, each time an address in the object
3395file is mentioned:
3396@itemize @bullet
3397@item
3398Where in the object file is the beginning of this reference to
3399an address?
3400@item
3401How long (in bytes) is this reference?
3402@item
3403Which section does the address refer to? What is the numeric value of
3404@display
3405(@var{address}) @minus{} (@var{start-address of section})?
3406@end display
3407@item
3408Is the reference to an address ``Program-Counter relative''?
3409@end itemize
3410
3411@cindex addresses, format of
3412@cindex section-relative addressing
3413In fact, every address @command{@value{AS}} ever uses is expressed as
3414@display
3415(@var{section}) + (@var{offset into section})
3416@end display
3417@noindent
3418Further, most expressions @command{@value{AS}} computes have this section-relative
3419nature.
3420@ifset SOM
3421(For some object formats, such as SOM for the HPPA, some expressions are
3422symbol-relative instead.)
3423@end ifset
3424
3425In this manual we use the notation @{@var{secname} @var{N}@} to mean ``offset
3426@var{N} into section @var{secname}.''
3427
3428Apart from text, data and bss sections you need to know about the
3429@dfn{absolute} section. When @code{@value{LD}} mixes partial programs,
3430addresses in the absolute section remain unchanged. For example, address
3431@code{@{absolute 0@}} is ``relocated'' to run-time address 0 by
3432@code{@value{LD}}. Although the linker never arranges two partial programs'
3433data sections with overlapping addresses after linking, @emph{by definition}
3434their absolute sections must overlap. Address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in one
3435part of a program is always the same address when the program is running as
3436address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in any other part of the program.
3437
3438The idea of sections is extended to the @dfn{undefined} section. Any
3439address whose section is unknown at assembly time is by definition
3440rendered @{undefined @var{U}@}---where @var{U} is filled in later.
3441Since numbers are always defined, the only way to generate an undefined
3442address is to mention an undefined symbol. A reference to a named
3443common block would be such a symbol: its value is unknown at assembly
3444time so it has section @emph{undefined}.
3445
3446By analogy the word @emph{section} is used to describe groups of sections in
3447the linked program. @code{@value{LD}} puts all partial programs' text
3448sections in contiguous addresses in the linked program. It is
3449customary to refer to the @emph{text section} of a program, meaning all
3450the addresses of all partial programs' text sections. Likewise for
3451data and bss sections.
3452
3453Some sections are manipulated by @code{@value{LD}}; others are invented for
3454use of @command{@value{AS}} and have no meaning except during assembly.
3455
3456@node Ld Sections
3457@section Linker Sections
3458@code{@value{LD}} deals with just four kinds of sections, summarized below.
3459
3460@table @strong
3461
3462@ifset COFF-ELF
3463@cindex named sections
3464@cindex sections, named
3465@item named sections
3466@end ifset
3467@ifset aout-bout
3468@cindex text section
3469@cindex data section
3470@itemx text section
3471@itemx data section
3472@end ifset
3473These sections hold your program. @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} treat them as
3474separate but equal sections. Anything you can say of one section is
3475true of another.
3476@c @ifset aout-bout
3477When the program is running, however, it is
3478customary for the text section to be unalterable. The
3479text section is often shared among processes: it contains
3480instructions, constants and the like. The data section of a running
3481program is usually alterable: for example, C variables would be stored
3482in the data section.
3483@c @end ifset
3484
3485@cindex bss section
3486@item bss section
3487This section contains zeroed bytes when your program begins running. It
3488is used to hold uninitialized variables or common storage. The length of
3489each partial program's bss section is important, but because it starts
3490out containing zeroed bytes there is no need to store explicit zero
3491bytes in the object file. The bss section was invented to eliminate
3492those explicit zeros from object files.
3493
3494@cindex absolute section
3495@item absolute section
3496Address 0 of this section is always ``relocated'' to runtime address 0.
3497This is useful if you want to refer to an address that @code{@value{LD}} must
3498not change when relocating. In this sense we speak of absolute
3499addresses being ``unrelocatable'': they do not change during relocation.
3500
3501@cindex undefined section
3502@item undefined section
3503This ``section'' is a catch-all for address references to objects not in
3504the preceding sections.
3505@c FIXME: ref to some other doc on obj-file formats could go here.
3506@end table
3507
3508@cindex relocation example
3509An idealized example of three relocatable sections follows.
3510@ifset COFF-ELF
3511The example uses the traditional section names @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}.
3512@end ifset
3513Memory addresses are on the horizontal axis.
3514
3515@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3516@ifnottex
3517@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3518@smallexample
3519 +-----+----+--+
3520partial program # 1: |ttttt|dddd|00|
3521 +-----+----+--+
3522
3523 text data bss
3524 seg. seg. seg.
3525
3526 +---+---+---+
3527partial program # 2: |TTT|DDD|000|
3528 +---+---+---+
3529
3530 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3531linked program: | |TTT|ttttt| |dddd|DDD|00000|
3532 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3533
3534 addresses: 0 @dots{}
3535@end smallexample
3536@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3537@end ifnottex
3538@need 5000
3539@tex
3540\bigskip
3541\line{\it Partial program \#1: \hfil}
3542\line{\ibox{2.5cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3543\line{\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt ttttt}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 00}\hfil}
3544
3545\line{\it Partial program \#2: \hfil}
3546\line{\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{1.5cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3547\line{\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt DDDD}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 000}\hfil}
3548
3549\line{\it linked program: \hfil}
3550\line{\ibox{.5cm}{}\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2.5cm}{}\ibox{.75cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1.5cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3551\line{\boxit{.5cm}{}\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt
3552ttttt}\boxit{.75cm}{}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt
3553DDDD}\boxit{2cm}{\tt 00000}\ \dots\hfil}
3554
3555\line{\it addresses: \hfil}
3556\line{0\dots\hfil}
3557
3558@end tex
3559@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3560
3561@node As Sections
3562@section Assembler Internal Sections
3563
3564@cindex internal assembler sections
3565@cindex sections in messages, internal
3566These sections are meant only for the internal use of @command{@value{AS}}. They
3567have no meaning at run-time. You do not really need to know about these
3568sections for most purposes; but they can be mentioned in @command{@value{AS}}
3569warning messages, so it might be helpful to have an idea of their
3570meanings to @command{@value{AS}}. These sections are used to permit the
3571value of every expression in your assembly language program to be a
3572section-relative address.
3573
3574@table @b
3575@cindex assembler internal logic error
3576@item ASSEMBLER-INTERNAL-LOGIC-ERROR!
3577An internal assembler logic error has been found. This means there is a
3578bug in the assembler.
3579
3580@cindex expr (internal section)
3581@item expr section
3582The assembler stores complex expression internally as combinations of
3583symbols. When it needs to represent an expression as a symbol, it puts
3584it in the expr section.
3585@c FIXME item debug
3586@c FIXME item transfer[t] vector preload
3587@c FIXME item transfer[t] vector postload
3588@c FIXME item register
3589@end table
3590
3591@node Sub-Sections
3592@section Sub-Sections
3593
3594@cindex numbered subsections
3595@cindex grouping data
3596@ifset aout-bout
3597Assembled bytes
3598@ifset COFF-ELF
3599conventionally
3600@end ifset
3601fall into two sections: text and data.
3602@end ifset
3603You may have separate groups of
3604@ifset GENERIC
3605data in named sections
3606@end ifset
3607@ifclear GENERIC
3608@ifclear aout-bout
3609data in named sections
3610@end ifclear
3611@ifset aout-bout
3612text or data
3613@end ifset
3614@end ifclear
3615that you want to end up near to each other in the object file, even though they
3616are not contiguous in the assembler source. @command{@value{AS}} allows you to
3617use @dfn{subsections} for this purpose. Within each section, there can be
3618numbered subsections with values from 0 to 8192. Objects assembled into the
3619same subsection go into the object file together with other objects in the same
3620subsection. For example, a compiler might want to store constants in the text
3621section, but might not want to have them interspersed with the program being
3622assembled. In this case, the compiler could issue a @samp{.text 0} before each
3623section of code being output, and a @samp{.text 1} before each group of
3624constants being output.
3625
3626Subsections are optional. If you do not use subsections, everything
3627goes in subsection number zero.
3628
3629@ifset GENERIC
3630Each subsection is zero-padded up to a multiple of four bytes.
3631(Subsections may be padded a different amount on different flavors
3632of @command{@value{AS}}.)
3633@end ifset
3634@ifclear GENERIC
3635@ifset H8
3636On the H8/300 platform, each subsection is zero-padded to a word
3637boundary (two bytes).
3638The same is true on the Renesas SH.
3639@end ifset
3640@ifset I960
3641@c FIXME section padding (alignment)?
3642@c Rich Pixley says padding here depends on target obj code format; that
3643@c doesn't seem particularly useful to say without further elaboration,
3644@c so for now I say nothing about it. If this is a generic BFD issue,
3645@c these paragraphs might need to vanish from this manual, and be
3646@c discussed in BFD chapter of binutils (or some such).
3647@end ifset
3648@end ifclear
3649
3650Subsections appear in your object file in numeric order, lowest numbered
3651to highest. (All this to be compatible with other people's assemblers.)
3652The object file contains no representation of subsections; @code{@value{LD}} and
3653other programs that manipulate object files see no trace of them.
3654They just see all your text subsections as a text section, and all your
3655data subsections as a data section.
3656
3657To specify which subsection you want subsequent statements assembled
3658into, use a numeric argument to specify it, in a @samp{.text
3659@var{expression}} or a @samp{.data @var{expression}} statement.
3660@ifset COFF
3661@ifset GENERIC
3662When generating COFF output, you
3663@end ifset
3664@ifclear GENERIC
3665You
3666@end ifclear
3667can also use an extra subsection
3668argument with arbitrary named sections: @samp{.section @var{name},
3669@var{expression}}.
3670@end ifset
3671@ifset ELF
3672@ifset GENERIC
3673When generating ELF output, you
3674@end ifset
3675@ifclear GENERIC
3676You
3677@end ifclear
3678can also use the @code{.subsection} directive (@pxref{SubSection})
3679to specify a subsection: @samp{.subsection @var{expression}}.
3680@end ifset
3681@var{Expression} should be an absolute expression
3682(@pxref{Expressions}). If you just say @samp{.text} then @samp{.text 0}
3683is assumed. Likewise @samp{.data} means @samp{.data 0}. Assembly
3684begins in @code{text 0}. For instance:
3685@smallexample
3686.text 0 # The default subsection is text 0 anyway.
3687.ascii "This lives in the first text subsection. *"
3688.text 1
3689.ascii "But this lives in the second text subsection."
3690.data 0
3691.ascii "This lives in the data section,"
3692.ascii "in the first data subsection."
3693.text 0
3694.ascii "This lives in the first text section,"
3695.ascii "immediately following the asterisk (*)."
3696@end smallexample
3697
3698Each section has a @dfn{location counter} incremented by one for every byte
3699assembled into that section. Because subsections are merely a convenience
3700restricted to @command{@value{AS}} there is no concept of a subsection location
3701counter. There is no way to directly manipulate a location counter---but the
3702@code{.align} directive changes it, and any label definition captures its
3703current value. The location counter of the section where statements are being
3704assembled is said to be the @dfn{active} location counter.
3705
3706@node bss
3707@section bss Section
3708
3709@cindex bss section
3710@cindex common variable storage
3711The bss section is used for local common variable storage.
3712You may allocate address space in the bss section, but you may
3713not dictate data to load into it before your program executes. When
3714your program starts running, all the contents of the bss
3715section are zeroed bytes.
3716
3717The @code{.lcomm} pseudo-op defines a symbol in the bss section; see
3718@ref{Lcomm,,@code{.lcomm}}.
3719
3720The @code{.comm} pseudo-op may be used to declare a common symbol, which is
3721another form of uninitialized symbol; see @ref{Comm,,@code{.comm}}.
3722
3723@ifset GENERIC
3724When assembling for a target which supports multiple sections, such as ELF or
3725COFF, you may switch into the @code{.bss} section and define symbols as usual;
3726see @ref{Section,,@code{.section}}. You may only assemble zero values into the
3727section. Typically the section will only contain symbol definitions and
3728@code{.skip} directives (@pxref{Skip,,@code{.skip}}).
3729@end ifset
3730
3731@node Symbols
3732@chapter Symbols
3733
3734@cindex symbols
3735Symbols are a central concept: the programmer uses symbols to name
3736things, the linker uses symbols to link, and the debugger uses symbols
3737to debug.
3738
3739@quotation
3740@cindex debuggers, and symbol order
3741@emph{Warning:} @command{@value{AS}} does not place symbols in the object file in
3742the same order they were declared. This may break some debuggers.
3743@end quotation
3744
3745@menu
3746* Labels:: Labels
3747* Setting Symbols:: Giving Symbols Other Values
3748* Symbol Names:: Symbol Names
3749* Dot:: The Special Dot Symbol
3750* Symbol Attributes:: Symbol Attributes
3751@end menu
3752
3753@node Labels
3754@section Labels
3755
3756@cindex labels
3757A @dfn{label} is written as a symbol immediately followed by a colon
3758@samp{:}. The symbol then represents the current value of the
3759active location counter, and is, for example, a suitable instruction
3760operand. You are warned if you use the same symbol to represent two
3761different locations: the first definition overrides any other
3762definitions.
3763
3764@ifset HPPA
3765On the HPPA, the usual form for a label need not be immediately followed by a
3766colon, but instead must start in column zero. Only one label may be defined on
3767a single line. To work around this, the HPPA version of @command{@value{AS}} also
3768provides a special directive @code{.label} for defining labels more flexibly.
3769@end ifset
3770
3771@node Setting Symbols
3772@section Giving Symbols Other Values
3773
3774@cindex assigning values to symbols
3775@cindex symbol values, assigning
3776A symbol can be given an arbitrary value by writing a symbol, followed
3777by an equals sign @samp{=}, followed by an expression
3778(@pxref{Expressions}). This is equivalent to using the @code{.set}
3779directive. @xref{Set,,@code{.set}}. In the same way, using a double
3780equals sign @samp{=}@samp{=} here represents an equivalent of the
3781@code{.eqv} directive. @xref{Eqv,,@code{.eqv}}.
3782
3783@ifset Blackfin
3784Blackfin does not support symbol assignment with @samp{=}.
3785@end ifset
3786
3787@node Symbol Names
3788@section Symbol Names
3789
3790@cindex symbol names
3791@cindex names, symbol
3792@ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
3793Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On most
3794machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions are
3795noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}. That character may be followed by any
3796string of digits, letters, dollar signs (unless otherwise noted for a
3797particular target machine), and underscores.
3798@end ifclear
3799@ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
3800@ifset H8
3801Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On the
3802Renesas SH you can also use @code{$} in symbol names. That
3803character may be followed by any string of digits, letters, dollar signs (save
3804on the H8/300), and underscores.
3805@end ifset
3806@end ifset
3807
3808Case of letters is significant: @code{foo} is a different symbol name
3809than @code{Foo}.
3810
3811Symbol names do not start with a digit. An exception to this rule is made for
3812Local Labels. See below.
3813
3814Multibyte characters are supported. To generate a symbol name containing
3815multibyte characters enclose it within double quotes and use escape codes. cf
3816@xref{Strings}. Generating a multibyte symbol name from a label is not
3817currently supported.
3818
3819Each symbol has exactly one name. Each name in an assembly language program
3820refers to exactly one symbol. You may use that symbol name any number of times
3821in a program.
3822
3823@subheading Local Symbol Names
3824
3825@cindex local symbol names
3826@cindex symbol names, local
3827A local symbol is any symbol beginning with certain local label prefixes.
3828By default, the local label prefix is @samp{.L} for ELF systems or
3829@samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, but each target may have its own
3830set of local label prefixes.
3831@ifset HPPA
3832On the HPPA local symbols begin with @samp{L$}.
3833@end ifset
3834
3835Local symbols are defined and used within the assembler, but they are
3836normally not saved in object files. Thus, they are not visible when debugging.
3837You may use the @samp{-L} option (@pxref{L, ,Include Local Symbols})
3838to retain the local symbols in the object files.
3839
3840@subheading Local Labels
3841
3842@cindex local labels
3843@cindex temporary symbol names
3844@cindex symbol names, temporary
3845Local labels are different from local symbols. Local labels help compilers and
3846programmers use names temporarily. They create symbols which are guaranteed to
3847be unique over the entire scope of the input source code and which can be
3848referred to by a simple notation. To define a local label, write a label of
3849the form @samp{@b{N}:} (where @b{N} represents any non-negative integer).
3850To refer to the most recent previous definition of that label write
3851@samp{@b{N}b}, using the same number as when you defined the label. To refer
3852to the next definition of a local label, write @samp{@b{N}f}. The @samp{b}
3853stands for ``backwards'' and the @samp{f} stands for ``forwards''.
3854
3855There is no restriction on how you can use these labels, and you can reuse them
3856too. So that it is possible to repeatedly define the same local label (using
3857the same number @samp{@b{N}}), although you can only refer to the most recently
3858defined local label of that number (for a backwards reference) or the next
3859definition of a specific local label for a forward reference. It is also worth
3860noting that the first 10 local labels (@samp{@b{0:}}@dots{}@samp{@b{9:}}) are
3861implemented in a slightly more efficient manner than the others.
3862
3863Here is an example:
3864
3865@smallexample
38661: branch 1f
38672: branch 1b
38681: branch 2f
38692: branch 1b
3870@end smallexample
3871
3872Which is the equivalent of:
3873
3874@smallexample
3875label_1: branch label_3
3876label_2: branch label_1
3877label_3: branch label_4
3878label_4: branch label_3
3879@end smallexample
3880
3881Local label names are only a notational device. They are immediately
3882transformed into more conventional symbol names before the assembler uses them.
3883The symbol names are stored in the symbol table, appear in error messages, and
3884are optionally emitted to the object file. The names are constructed using
3885these parts:
3886
3887@table @code
3888@item @emph{local label prefix}
3889All local symbols begin with the system-specific local label prefix.
3890Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} forget symbols
3891that start with the local label prefix. These labels are
3892used for symbols you are never intended to see. If you use the
3893@samp{-L} option then @command{@value{AS}} retains these symbols in the
3894object file. If you also instruct @code{@value{LD}} to retain these symbols,
3895you may use them in debugging.
3896
3897@item @var{number}
3898This is the number that was used in the local label definition. So if the
3899label is written @samp{55:} then the number is @samp{55}.
3900
3901@item @kbd{C-B}
3902This unusual character is included so you do not accidentally invent a symbol
3903of the same name. The character has ASCII value of @samp{\002} (control-B).
3904
3905@item @emph{ordinal number}
3906This is a serial number to keep the labels distinct. The first definition of
3907@samp{0:} gets the number @samp{1}. The 15th definition of @samp{0:} gets the
3908number @samp{15}, and so on. Likewise the first definition of @samp{1:} gets
3909the number @samp{1} and its 15th definition gets @samp{15} as well.
3910@end table
3911
3912So for example, the first @code{1:} may be named @code{.L1@kbd{C-B}1}, and
3913the 44th @code{3:} may be named @code{.L3@kbd{C-B}44}.
3914
3915@subheading Dollar Local Labels
3916@cindex dollar local symbols
3917
3918On some targets @code{@value{AS}} also supports an even more local form of
3919local labels called dollar labels. These labels go out of scope (i.e., they
3920become undefined) as soon as a non-local label is defined. Thus they remain
3921valid for only a small region of the input source code. Normal local labels,
3922by contrast, remain in scope for the entire file, or until they are redefined
3923by another occurrence of the same local label.
3924
3925Dollar labels are defined in exactly the same way as ordinary local labels,
3926except that they have a dollar sign suffix to their numeric value, e.g.,
3927@samp{@b{55$:}}.
3928
3929They can also be distinguished from ordinary local labels by their transformed
3930names which use ASCII character @samp{\001} (control-A) as the magic character
3931to distinguish them from ordinary labels. For example, the fifth definition of
3932@samp{6$} may be named @samp{.L6@kbd{C-A}5}.
3933
3934@node Dot
3935@section The Special Dot Symbol
3936
3937@cindex dot (symbol)
3938@cindex @code{.} (symbol)
3939@cindex current address
3940@cindex location counter
3941The special symbol @samp{.} refers to the current address that
3942@command{@value{AS}} is assembling into. Thus, the expression @samp{melvin:
3943.long .} defines @code{melvin} to contain its own address.
3944Assigning a value to @code{.} is treated the same as a @code{.org}
3945directive.
3946@ifclear no-space-dir
3947Thus, the expression @samp{.=.+4} is the same as saying
3948@samp{.space 4}.
3949@end ifclear
3950
3951@node Symbol Attributes
3952@section Symbol Attributes
3953
3954@cindex symbol attributes
3955@cindex attributes, symbol
3956Every symbol has, as well as its name, the attributes ``Value'' and
3957``Type''. Depending on output format, symbols can also have auxiliary
3958attributes.
3959@ifset INTERNALS
3960The detailed definitions are in @file{a.out.h}.
3961@end ifset
3962
3963If you use a symbol without defining it, @command{@value{AS}} assumes zero for
3964all these attributes, and probably won't warn you. This makes the
3965symbol an externally defined symbol, which is generally what you
3966would want.
3967
3968@menu
3969* Symbol Value:: Value
3970* Symbol Type:: Type
3971@ifset aout-bout
3972@ifset GENERIC
3973* a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3974@end ifset
3975@ifclear GENERIC
3976@ifclear BOUT
3977* a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3978@end ifclear
3979@ifset BOUT
3980* a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
3981@end ifset
3982@end ifclear
3983@end ifset
3984@ifset COFF
3985* COFF Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for COFF
3986@end ifset
3987@ifset SOM
3988* SOM Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for SOM
3989@end ifset
3990@end menu
3991
3992@node Symbol Value
3993@subsection Value
3994
3995@cindex value of a symbol
3996@cindex symbol value
3997The value of a symbol is (usually) 32 bits. For a symbol which labels a
3998location in the text, data, bss or absolute sections the value is the
3999number of addresses from the start of that section to the label.
4000Naturally for text, data and bss sections the value of a symbol changes
4001as @code{@value{LD}} changes section base addresses during linking. Absolute
4002symbols' values do not change during linking: that is why they are
4003called absolute.
4004
4005The value of an undefined symbol is treated in a special way. If it is
40060 then the symbol is not defined in this assembler source file, and
4007@code{@value{LD}} tries to determine its value from other files linked into the
4008same program. You make this kind of symbol simply by mentioning a symbol
4009name without defining it. A non-zero value represents a @code{.comm}
4010common declaration. The value is how much common storage to reserve, in
4011bytes (addresses). The symbol refers to the first address of the
4012allocated storage.
4013
4014@node Symbol Type
4015@subsection Type
4016
4017@cindex type of a symbol
4018@cindex symbol type
4019The type attribute of a symbol contains relocation (section)
4020information, any flag settings indicating that a symbol is external, and
4021(optionally), other information for linkers and debuggers. The exact
4022format depends on the object-code output format in use.
4023
4024@ifset aout-bout
4025@ifclear GENERIC
4026@ifset BOUT
4027@c The following avoids a "widow" subsection title. @group would be
4028@c better if it were available outside examples.
4029@need 1000
4030@node a.out Symbols
4031@subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
4032
4033@cindex @code{b.out} symbol attributes
4034@cindex symbol attributes, @code{b.out}
4035These symbol attributes appear only when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for
4036one of the Berkeley-descended object output formats---@code{a.out} or
4037@code{b.out}.
4038
4039@end ifset
4040@ifclear BOUT
4041@node a.out Symbols
4042@subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
4043
4044@cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
4045@cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
4046
4047@end ifclear
4048@end ifclear
4049@ifset GENERIC
4050@node a.out Symbols
4051@subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
4052
4053@cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
4054@cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
4055
4056@end ifset
4057@menu
4058* Symbol Desc:: Descriptor
4059* Symbol Other:: Other
4060@end menu
4061
4062@node Symbol Desc
4063@subsubsection Descriptor
4064
4065@cindex descriptor, of @code{a.out} symbol
4066This is an arbitrary 16-bit value. You may establish a symbol's
4067descriptor value by using a @code{.desc} statement
4068(@pxref{Desc,,@code{.desc}}). A descriptor value means nothing to
4069@command{@value{AS}}.
4070
4071@node Symbol Other
4072@subsubsection Other
4073
4074@cindex other attribute, of @code{a.out} symbol
4075This is an arbitrary 8-bit value. It means nothing to @command{@value{AS}}.
4076@end ifset
4077
4078@ifset COFF
4079@node COFF Symbols
4080@subsection Symbol Attributes for COFF
4081
4082@cindex COFF symbol attributes
4083@cindex symbol attributes, COFF
4084
4085The COFF format supports a multitude of auxiliary symbol attributes;
4086like the primary symbol attributes, they are set between @code{.def} and
4087@code{.endef} directives.
4088
4089@subsubsection Primary Attributes
4090
4091@cindex primary attributes, COFF symbols
4092The symbol name is set with @code{.def}; the value and type,
4093respectively, with @code{.val} and @code{.type}.
4094
4095@subsubsection Auxiliary Attributes
4096
4097@cindex auxiliary attributes, COFF symbols
4098The @command{@value{AS}} directives @code{.dim}, @code{.line}, @code{.scl},
4099@code{.size}, @code{.tag}, and @code{.weak} can generate auxiliary symbol
4100table information for COFF.
4101@end ifset
4102
4103@ifset SOM
4104@node SOM Symbols
4105@subsection Symbol Attributes for SOM
4106
4107@cindex SOM symbol attributes
4108@cindex symbol attributes, SOM
4109
4110The SOM format for the HPPA supports a multitude of symbol attributes set with
4111the @code{.EXPORT} and @code{.IMPORT} directives.
4112
4113The attributes are described in @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly
4114Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) under the @code{IMPORT} and
4115@code{EXPORT} assembler directive documentation.
4116@end ifset
4117
4118@node Expressions
4119@chapter Expressions
4120
4121@cindex expressions
4122@cindex addresses
4123@cindex numeric values
4124An @dfn{expression} specifies an address or numeric value.
4125Whitespace may precede and/or follow an expression.
4126
4127The result of an expression must be an absolute number, or else an offset into
4128a particular section. If an expression is not absolute, and there is not
4129enough information when @command{@value{AS}} sees the expression to know its
4130section, a second pass over the source program might be necessary to interpret
4131the expression---but the second pass is currently not implemented.
4132@command{@value{AS}} aborts with an error message in this situation.
4133
4134@menu
4135* Empty Exprs:: Empty Expressions
4136* Integer Exprs:: Integer Expressions
4137@end menu
4138
4139@node Empty Exprs
4140@section Empty Expressions
4141
4142@cindex empty expressions
4143@cindex expressions, empty
4144An empty expression has no value: it is just whitespace or null.
4145Wherever an absolute expression is required, you may omit the
4146expression, and @command{@value{AS}} assumes a value of (absolute) 0. This
4147is compatible with other assemblers.
4148
4149@node Integer Exprs
4150@section Integer Expressions
4151
4152@cindex integer expressions
4153@cindex expressions, integer
4154An @dfn{integer expression} is one or more @emph{arguments} delimited
4155by @emph{operators}.
4156
4157@menu
4158* Arguments:: Arguments
4159* Operators:: Operators
4160* Prefix Ops:: Prefix Operators
4161* Infix Ops:: Infix Operators
4162@end menu
4163
4164@node Arguments
4165@subsection Arguments
4166
4167@cindex expression arguments
4168@cindex arguments in expressions
4169@cindex operands in expressions
4170@cindex arithmetic operands
4171@dfn{Arguments} are symbols, numbers or subexpressions. In other
4172contexts arguments are sometimes called ``arithmetic operands''. In
4173this manual, to avoid confusing them with the ``instruction operands'' of
4174the machine language, we use the term ``argument'' to refer to parts of
4175expressions only, reserving the word ``operand'' to refer only to machine
4176instruction operands.
4177
4178Symbols are evaluated to yield @{@var{section} @var{NNN}@} where
4179@var{section} is one of text, data, bss, absolute,
4180or undefined. @var{NNN} is a signed, 2's complement 32 bit
4181integer.
4182
4183Numbers are usually integers.
4184
4185A number can be a flonum or bignum. In this case, you are warned
4186that only the low order 32 bits are used, and @command{@value{AS}} pretends
4187these 32 bits are an integer. You may write integer-manipulating
4188instructions that act on exotic constants, compatible with other
4189assemblers.
4190
4191@cindex subexpressions
4192Subexpressions are a left parenthesis @samp{(} followed by an integer
4193expression, followed by a right parenthesis @samp{)}; or a prefix
4194operator followed by an argument.
4195
4196@node Operators
4197@subsection Operators
4198
4199@cindex operators, in expressions
4200@cindex arithmetic functions
4201@cindex functions, in expressions
4202@dfn{Operators} are arithmetic functions, like @code{+} or @code{%}. Prefix
4203operators are followed by an argument. Infix operators appear
4204between their arguments. Operators may be preceded and/or followed by
4205whitespace.
4206
4207@node Prefix Ops
4208@subsection Prefix Operator
4209
4210@cindex prefix operators
4211@command{@value{AS}} has the following @dfn{prefix operators}. They each take
4212one argument, which must be absolute.
4213
4214@c the tex/end tex stuff surrounding this small table is meant to make
4215@c it align, on the printed page, with the similar table in the next
4216@c section (which is inside an enumerate).
4217@tex
4218\global\advance\leftskip by \itemindent
4219@end tex
4220
4221@table @code
4222@item -
4223@dfn{Negation}. Two's complement negation.
4224@item ~
4225@dfn{Complementation}. Bitwise not.
4226@end table
4227
4228@tex
4229\global\advance\leftskip by -\itemindent
4230@end tex
4231
4232@node Infix Ops
4233@subsection Infix Operators
4234
4235@cindex infix operators
4236@cindex operators, permitted arguments
4237@dfn{Infix operators} take two arguments, one on either side. Operators
4238have precedence, but operations with equal precedence are performed left
4239to right. Apart from @code{+} or @option{-}, both arguments must be
4240absolute, and the result is absolute.
4241
4242@enumerate
4243@cindex operator precedence
4244@cindex precedence of operators
4245
4246@item
4247Highest Precedence
4248
4249@table @code
4250@item *
4251@dfn{Multiplication}.
4252
4253@item /
4254@dfn{Division}. Truncation is the same as the C operator @samp{/}
4255
4256@item %
4257@dfn{Remainder}.
4258
4259@item <<
4260@dfn{Shift Left}. Same as the C operator @samp{<<}.
4261
4262@item >>
4263@dfn{Shift Right}. Same as the C operator @samp{>>}.
4264@end table
4265
4266@item
4267Intermediate precedence
4268
4269@table @code
4270@item |
4271
4272@dfn{Bitwise Inclusive Or}.
4273
4274@item &
4275@dfn{Bitwise And}.
4276
4277@item ^
4278@dfn{Bitwise Exclusive Or}.
4279
4280@item !
4281@dfn{Bitwise Or Not}.
4282@end table
4283
4284@item
4285Low Precedence
4286
4287@table @code
4288@cindex addition, permitted arguments
4289@cindex plus, permitted arguments
4290@cindex arguments for addition
4291@item +
4292@dfn{Addition}. If either argument is absolute, the result has the section of
4293the other argument. You may not add together arguments from different
4294sections.
4295
4296@cindex subtraction, permitted arguments
4297@cindex minus, permitted arguments
4298@cindex arguments for subtraction
4299@item -
4300@dfn{Subtraction}. If the right argument is absolute, the
4301result has the section of the left argument.
4302If both arguments are in the same section, the result is absolute.
4303You may not subtract arguments from different sections.
4304@c FIXME is there still something useful to say about undefined - undefined ?
4305
4306@cindex comparison expressions
4307@cindex expressions, comparison
4308@item ==
4309@dfn{Is Equal To}
4310@item <>
4311@itemx !=
4312@dfn{Is Not Equal To}
4313@item <
4314@dfn{Is Less Than}
4315@item >
4316@dfn{Is Greater Than}
4317@item >=
4318@dfn{Is Greater Than Or Equal To}
4319@item <=
4320@dfn{Is Less Than Or Equal To}
4321
4322The comparison operators can be used as infix operators. A true results has a
4323value of -1 whereas a false result has a value of 0. Note, these operators
4324perform signed comparisons.
4325@end table
4326
4327@item Lowest Precedence
4328
4329@table @code
4330@item &&
4331@dfn{Logical And}.
4332
4333@item ||
4334@dfn{Logical Or}.
4335
4336These two logical operations can be used to combine the results of sub
4337expressions. Note, unlike the comparison operators a true result returns a
4338value of 1 but a false results does still return 0. Also note that the logical
4339or operator has a slightly lower precedence than logical and.
4340
4341@end table
4342@end enumerate
4343
4344In short, it's only meaningful to add or subtract the @emph{offsets} in an
4345address; you can only have a defined section in one of the two arguments.
4346
4347@node Pseudo Ops
4348@chapter Assembler Directives
4349
4350@cindex directives, machine independent
4351@cindex pseudo-ops, machine independent
4352@cindex machine independent directives
4353All assembler directives have names that begin with a period (@samp{.}).
4354The names are case insensitive for most targets, and usually written
4355in lower case.
4356
4357This chapter discusses directives that are available regardless of the
4358target machine configuration for the @sc{gnu} assembler.
4359@ifset GENERIC
4360Some machine configurations provide additional directives.
4361@xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4362@end ifset
4363@ifclear GENERIC
4364@ifset machine-directives
4365@xref{Machine Dependencies}, for additional directives.
4366@end ifset
4367@end ifclear
4368
4369@menu
4370* Abort:: @code{.abort}
4371@ifset COFF
4372* ABORT (COFF):: @code{.ABORT}
4373@end ifset
4374
4375* Align:: @code{.align @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4376* Altmacro:: @code{.altmacro}
4377* Ascii:: @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4378* Asciz:: @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4379* Balign:: @code{.balign @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4380* Bundle directives:: @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}, etc
4381* Byte:: @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4382* CFI directives:: @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}, @code{.cfi_endproc}, etc.
4383* Comm:: @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4384* Data:: @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4385@ifset COFF
4386* Def:: @code{.def @var{name}}
4387@end ifset
4388@ifset aout-bout
4389* Desc:: @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4390@end ifset
4391@ifset COFF
4392* Dim:: @code{.dim}
4393@end ifset
4394
4395* Double:: @code{.double @var{flonums}}
4396* Eject:: @code{.eject}
4397* Else:: @code{.else}
4398* Elseif:: @code{.elseif}
4399* End:: @code{.end}
4400@ifset COFF
4401* Endef:: @code{.endef}
4402@end ifset
4403
4404* Endfunc:: @code{.endfunc}
4405* Endif:: @code{.endif}
4406* Equ:: @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4407* Equiv:: @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4408* Eqv:: @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4409* Err:: @code{.err}
4410* Error:: @code{.error @var{string}}
4411* Exitm:: @code{.exitm}
4412* Extern:: @code{.extern}
4413* Fail:: @code{.fail}
4414* File:: @code{.file}
4415* Fill:: @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
4416* Float:: @code{.float @var{flonums}}
4417* Func:: @code{.func}
4418* Global:: @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
4419@ifset ELF
4420* Gnu_attribute:: @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
4421* Hidden:: @code{.hidden @var{names}}
4422@end ifset
4423
4424* hword:: @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
4425* Ident:: @code{.ident}
4426* If:: @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
4427* Incbin:: @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
4428* Include:: @code{.include "@var{file}"}
4429* Int:: @code{.int @var{expressions}}
4430@ifset ELF
4431* Internal:: @code{.internal @var{names}}
4432@end ifset
4433
4434* Irp:: @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4435* Irpc:: @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4436* Lcomm:: @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
4437* Lflags:: @code{.lflags}
4438@ifclear no-line-dir
4439* Line:: @code{.line @var{line-number}}
4440@end ifclear
4441
4442* Linkonce:: @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
4443* List:: @code{.list}
4444* Ln:: @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
4445* Loc:: @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno}}
4446* Loc_mark_labels:: @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
4447@ifset ELF
4448* Local:: @code{.local @var{names}}
4449@end ifset
4450
4451* Long:: @code{.long @var{expressions}}
4452@ignore
4453* Lsym:: @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4454@end ignore
4455
4456* Macro:: @code{.macro @var{name} @var{args}}@dots{}
4457* MRI:: @code{.mri @var{val}}
4458* Noaltmacro:: @code{.noaltmacro}
4459* Nolist:: @code{.nolist}
4460* Octa:: @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
4461* Offset:: @code{.offset @var{loc}}
4462* Org:: @code{.org @var{new-lc}, @var{fill}}
4463* P2align:: @code{.p2align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4464@ifset ELF
4465* PopSection:: @code{.popsection}
4466* Previous:: @code{.previous}
4467@end ifset
4468
4469* Print:: @code{.print @var{string}}
4470@ifset ELF
4471* Protected:: @code{.protected @var{names}}
4472@end ifset
4473
4474* Psize:: @code{.psize @var{lines}, @var{columns}}
4475* Purgem:: @code{.purgem @var{name}}
4476@ifset ELF
4477* PushSection:: @code{.pushsection @var{name}}
4478@end ifset
4479
4480* Quad:: @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
4481* Reloc:: @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
4482* Rept:: @code{.rept @var{count}}
4483* Sbttl:: @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
4484@ifset COFF
4485* Scl:: @code{.scl @var{class}}
4486@end ifset
4487@ifset COFF-ELF
4488* Section:: @code{.section @var{name}[, @var{flags}]}
4489@end ifset
4490
4491* Set:: @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4492* Short:: @code{.short @var{expressions}}
4493* Single:: @code{.single @var{flonums}}
4494@ifset COFF-ELF
4495* Size:: @code{.size [@var{name} , @var{expression}]}
4496@end ifset
4497@ifclear no-space-dir
4498* Skip:: @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4499@end ifclear
4500
4501* Sleb128:: @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
4502@ifclear no-space-dir
4503* Space:: @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4504@end ifclear
4505@ifset have-stabs
4506* Stab:: @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
4507@end ifset
4508
4509* String:: @code{.string "@var{str}"}, @code{.string8 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string16 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string32 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string64 "@var{str}"}
4510* Struct:: @code{.struct @var{expression}}
4511@ifset ELF
4512* SubSection:: @code{.subsection}
4513* Symver:: @code{.symver @var{name},@var{name2@@nodename}}
4514@end ifset
4515
4516@ifset COFF
4517* Tag:: @code{.tag @var{structname}}
4518@end ifset
4519
4520* Text:: @code{.text @var{subsection}}
4521* Title:: @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
4522@ifset COFF-ELF
4523* Type:: @code{.type <@var{int} | @var{name} , @var{type description}>}
4524@end ifset
4525
4526* Uleb128:: @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
4527@ifset COFF
4528* Val:: @code{.val @var{addr}}
4529@end ifset
4530
4531@ifset ELF
4532* Version:: @code{.version "@var{string}"}
4533* VTableEntry:: @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
4534* VTableInherit:: @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
4535@end ifset
4536
4537* Warning:: @code{.warning @var{string}}
4538* Weak:: @code{.weak @var{names}}
4539* Weakref:: @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{symbol}}
4540* Word:: @code{.word @var{expressions}}
4541@ifclear no-space-dir
4542* Zero:: @code{.zero @var{size}}
4543@end ifclear
4544* Deprecated:: Deprecated Directives
4545@end menu
4546
4547@node Abort
4548@section @code{.abort}
4549
4550@cindex @code{abort} directive
4551@cindex stopping the assembly
4552This directive stops the assembly immediately. It is for
4553compatibility with other assemblers. The original idea was that the
4554assembly language source would be piped into the assembler. If the sender
4555of the source quit, it could use this directive tells @command{@value{AS}} to
4556quit also. One day @code{.abort} will not be supported.
4557
4558@ifset COFF
4559@node ABORT (COFF)
4560@section @code{.ABORT} (COFF)
4561
4562@cindex @code{ABORT} directive
4563When producing COFF output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive as a
4564synonym for @samp{.abort}.
4565
4566@ifset BOUT
4567When producing @code{b.out} output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive,
4568but ignores it.
4569@end ifset
4570@end ifset
4571
4572@node Align
4573@section @code{.align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4574
4575@cindex padding the location counter
4576@cindex @code{align} directive
4577Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular storage
4578boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the alignment
4579required, as described below.
4580
4581The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4582padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4583padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
4584marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4585with no-op instructions.
4586
4587The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4588it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4589directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4590specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4591fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4592required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4593with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4594
4595The way the required alignment is specified varies from system to system.
4596For the arc, hppa, i386 using ELF, i860, iq2000, m68k, or1k,
4597s390, sparc, tic4x, tic80 and xtensa, the first expression is the
4598alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.align 8} advances
4599the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4600is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed. For the tic54x, the
4601first expression is the alignment request in words.
4602
4603For other systems, including ppc, i386 using a.out format, arm and
4604strongarm, it is the
4605number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
4606advancement. For example @samp{.align 3} advances the location
4607counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
4608multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4609
4610This inconsistency is due to the different behaviors of the various
4611native assemblers for these systems which GAS must emulate.
4612GAS also provides @code{.balign} and @code{.p2align} directives,
4613described later, which have a consistent behavior across all
4614architectures (but are specific to GAS).
4615
4616@node Altmacro
4617@section @code{.altmacro}
4618Enable alternate macro mode, enabling:
4619
4620@ftable @code
4621@item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
4622One additional directive, @code{LOCAL}, is available. It is used to
4623generate a string replacement for each of the @var{name} arguments, and
4624replace any instances of @var{name} in each macro expansion. The
4625replacement string is unique in the assembly, and different for each
4626separate macro expansion. @code{LOCAL} allows you to write macros that
4627define symbols, without fear of conflict between separate macro expansions.
4628
4629@item String delimiters
4630You can write strings delimited in these other ways besides
4631@code{"@var{string}"}:
4632
4633@table @code
4634@item '@var{string}'
4635You can delimit strings with single-quote characters.
4636
4637@item <@var{string}>
4638You can delimit strings with matching angle brackets.
4639@end table
4640
4641@item single-character string escape
4642To include any single character literally in a string (even if the
4643character would otherwise have some special meaning), you can prefix the
4644character with @samp{!} (an exclamation mark). For example, you can
4645write @samp{<4.3 !> 5.4!!>} to get the literal text @samp{4.3 > 5.4!}.
4646
4647@item Expression results as strings
4648You can write @samp{%@var{expr}} to evaluate the expression @var{expr}
4649and use the result as a string.
4650@end ftable
4651
4652@node Ascii
4653@section @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4654
4655@cindex @code{ascii} directive
4656@cindex string literals
4657@code{.ascii} expects zero or more string literals (@pxref{Strings})
4658separated by commas. It assembles each string (with no automatic
4659trailing zero byte) into consecutive addresses.
4660
4661@node Asciz
4662@section @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4663
4664@cindex @code{asciz} directive
4665@cindex zero-terminated strings
4666@cindex null-terminated strings
4667@code{.asciz} is just like @code{.ascii}, but each string is followed by
4668a zero byte. The ``z'' in @samp{.asciz} stands for ``zero''.
4669
4670@node Balign
4671@section @code{.balign[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4672
4673@cindex padding the location counter given number of bytes
4674@cindex @code{balign} directive
4675Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
4676storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
4677alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.balign 8} advances
4678the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4679is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4680
4681The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4682padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4683padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
4684marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4685with no-op instructions.
4686
4687The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4688it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4689directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4690specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4691fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4692required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4693with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4694
4695@cindex @code{balignw} directive
4696@cindex @code{balignl} directive
4697The @code{.balignw} and @code{.balignl} directives are variants of the
4698@code{.balign} directive. The @code{.balignw} directive treats the fill
4699pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.balignl} directives treats the
4700fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.balignw
47014,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
4702filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
4703the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
4704undefined.
4705
4706@node Bundle directives
4707@section Bundle directives
4708@subsection @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}
4709@cindex @code{bundle_align_mode} directive
4710@cindex bundle
4711@cindex instruction bundle
4712@cindex aligned instruction bundle
4713@code{.bundle_align_mode} enables or disables @dfn{aligned instruction
4714bundle} mode. In this mode, sequences of adjacent instructions are grouped
4715into fixed-sized @dfn{bundles}. If the argument is zero, this mode is
4716disabled (which is the default state). If the argument it not zero, it
4717gives the size of an instruction bundle as a power of two (as for the
4718@code{.p2align} directive, @pxref{P2align}).
4719
4720For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that no instruction may span a
4721certain aligned boundary. A @dfn{bundle} is simply a sequence of
4722instructions that starts on an aligned boundary. For example, if
4723@var{abs-expr} is @code{5} then the bundle size is 32, so each aligned
4724chunk of 32 bytes is a bundle. When aligned instruction bundle mode is in
4725effect, no single instruction may span a boundary between bundles. If an
4726instruction would start too close to the end of a bundle for the length of
4727that particular instruction to fit within the bundle, then the space at the
4728end of that bundle is filled with no-op instructions so the instruction
4729starts in the next bundle. As a corollary, it's an error if any single
4730instruction's encoding is longer than the bundle size.
4731
4732@subsection @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4733@cindex @code{bundle_lock} directive
4734@cindex @code{bundle_unlock} directive
4735The @code{.bundle_lock} and directive @code{.bundle_unlock} directives
4736allow explicit control over instruction bundle padding. These directives
4737are only valid when @code{.bundle_align_mode} has been used to enable
4738aligned instruction bundle mode. It's an error if they appear when
4739@code{.bundle_align_mode} has not been used at all, or when the last
4740directive was @w{@code{.bundle_align_mode 0}}.
4741
4742@cindex bundle-locked
4743For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that certain instructions may
4744appear only as part of specified permissible sequences of multiple
4745instructions, all within the same bundle. A pair of @code{.bundle_lock}
4746and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives define a @dfn{bundle-locked}
4747instruction sequence. For purposes of aligned instruction bundle mode, a
4748sequence starting with @code{.bundle_lock} and ending with
4749@code{.bundle_unlock} is treated as a single instruction. That is, the
4750entire sequence must fit into a single bundle and may not span a bundle
4751boundary. If necessary, no-op instructions will be inserted before the
4752first instruction of the sequence so that the whole sequence starts on an
4753aligned bundle boundary. It's an error if the sequence is longer than the
4754bundle size.
4755
4756For convenience when using @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4757inside assembler macros (@pxref{Macro}), bundle-locked sequences may be
4758nested. That is, a second @code{.bundle_lock} directive before the next
4759@code{.bundle_unlock} directive has no effect except that it must be
4760matched by another closing @code{.bundle_unlock} so that there is the
4761same number of @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives.
4762
4763@node Byte
4764@section @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4765
4766@cindex @code{byte} directive
4767@cindex integers, one byte
4768@code{.byte} expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas.
4769Each expression is assembled into the next byte.
4770
4771@node CFI directives
4772@section CFI directives
4773@subsection @code{.cfi_sections @var{section_list}}
4774@cindex @code{cfi_sections} directive
4775@code{.cfi_sections} may be used to specify whether CFI directives
4776should emit @code{.eh_frame} section and/or @code{.debug_frame} section.
4777If @var{section_list} is @code{.eh_frame}, @code{.eh_frame} is emitted,
4778if @var{section_list} is @code{.debug_frame}, @code{.debug_frame} is emitted.
4779To emit both use @code{.eh_frame, .debug_frame}. The default if this
4780directive is not used is @code{.cfi_sections .eh_frame}.
4781
4782On targets that support compact unwinding tables these can be generated
4783by specifying @code{.eh_frame_entry} instead of @code{.eh_frame}.
4784
4785Some targets may support an additional name, such as @code{.c6xabi.exidx}
4786which is used by the @value{TIC6X} target.
4787
4788The @code{.cfi_sections} directive can be repeated, with the same or different
4789arguments, provided that CFI generation has not yet started. Once CFI
4790generation has started however the section list is fixed and any attempts to
4791redefine it will result in an error.
4792
4793@subsection @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}
4794@cindex @code{cfi_startproc} directive
4795@code{.cfi_startproc} is used at the beginning of each function that
4796should have an entry in @code{.eh_frame}. It initializes some internal
4797data structures. Don't forget to close the function by
4798@code{.cfi_endproc}.
4799
4800Unless @code{.cfi_startproc} is used along with parameter @code{simple}
4801it also emits some architecture dependent initial CFI instructions.
4802
4803@subsection @code{.cfi_endproc}
4804@cindex @code{cfi_endproc} directive
4805@code{.cfi_endproc} is used at the end of a function where it closes its
4806unwind entry previously opened by
4807@code{.cfi_startproc}, and emits it to @code{.eh_frame}.
4808
4809@subsection @code{.cfi_personality @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4810@cindex @code{cfi_personality} directive
4811@code{.cfi_personality} defines personality routine and its encoding.
4812@var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the personality
4813should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second
4814argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be
4815a constant or a symbol name. When using indirect encodings,
4816the symbol provided should be the location where personality
4817can be loaded from, not the personality routine itself.
4818The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_personality 0xff},
4819no personality routine.
4820
4821@subsection @code{.cfi_personality_id @var{id}}
4822@cindex @code{cfi_personality_id} directive
4823@code{cfi_personality_id} defines a personality routine by its index as
4824defined in a compact unwinding format.
4825Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4826with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4827
4828@subsection @code{.cfi_fde_data [@var{opcode1} [, @dots{}]]}
4829@cindex @code{cfi_fde_data} directive
4830@code{cfi_fde_data} is used to describe the compact unwind opcodes to be
4831used for the current function. These are emitted inline in the
4832@code{.eh_frame_entry} section if small enough and there is no LSDA, or
4833in the @code{.gnu.extab} section otherwise.
4834Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4835with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4836
4837@subsection @code{.cfi_lsda @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4838@code{.cfi_lsda} defines LSDA and its encoding.
4839@var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the LSDA
4840should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), the second
4841argument is not present, otherwise the second argument should be a constant
4842or a symbol name. The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_lsda 0xff},
4843meaning that no LSDA is present.
4844
4845@subsection @code{.cfi_inline_lsda} [@var{align}]
4846@code{.cfi_inline_lsda} marks the start of a LSDA data section and
4847switches to the corresponding @code{.gnu.extab} section.
4848Must be preceded by a CFI block containing a @code{.cfi_lsda} directive.
4849Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4850with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4851
4852The table header and unwinding opcodes will be generated at this point,
4853so that they are immediately followed by the LSDA data. The symbol
4854referenced by the @code{.cfi_lsda} directive should still be defined
4855in case a fallback FDE based encoding is used. The LSDA data is terminated
4856by a section directive.
4857
4858The optional @var{align} argument specifies the alignment required.
4859The alignment is specified as a power of two, as with the
4860@code{.p2align} directive.
4861
4862@subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4863@code{.cfi_def_cfa} defines a rule for computing CFA as: @i{take
4864address from @var{register} and add @var{offset} to it}.
4865
4866@subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register @var{register}}
4867@code{.cfi_def_cfa_register} modifies a rule for computing CFA. From
4868now on @var{register} will be used instead of the old one. Offset
4869remains the same.
4870
4871@subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4872@code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} modifies a rule for computing CFA. Register
4873remains the same, but @var{offset} is new. Note that it is the
4874absolute offset that will be added to a defined register to compute
4875CFA address.
4876
4877@subsection @code{.cfi_adjust_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4878Same as @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} but @var{offset} is a relative
4879value that is added/substracted from the previous offset.
4880
4881@subsection @code{.cfi_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4882Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4883CFA.
4884
4885@subsection @code{.cfi_val_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4886Previous value of @var{register} is CFA + @var{offset}.
4887
4888@subsection @code{.cfi_rel_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4889Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4890the current CFA register. This is transformed to @code{.cfi_offset}
4891using the known displacement of the CFA register from the CFA.
4892This is often easier to use, because the number will match the
4893code it's annotating.
4894
4895@subsection @code{.cfi_register @var{register1}, @var{register2}}
4896Previous value of @var{register1} is saved in register @var{register2}.
4897
4898@subsection @code{.cfi_restore @var{register}}
4899@code{.cfi_restore} says that the rule for @var{register} is now the
4900same as it was at the beginning of the function, after all initial
4901instruction added by @code{.cfi_startproc} were executed.
4902
4903@subsection @code{.cfi_undefined @var{register}}
4904From now on the previous value of @var{register} can't be restored anymore.
4905
4906@subsection @code{.cfi_same_value @var{register}}
4907Current value of @var{register} is the same like in the previous frame,
4908i.e. no restoration needed.
4909
4910@subsection @code{.cfi_remember_state} and @code{.cfi_restore_state}
4911@code{.cfi_remember_state} pushes the set of rules for every register onto an
4912implicit stack, while @code{.cfi_restore_state} pops them off the stack and
4913places them in the current row. This is useful for situations where you have
4914multiple @code{.cfi_*} directives that need to be undone due to the control
4915flow of the program. For example, we could have something like this (assuming
4916the CFA is the value of @code{rbp}):
4917
4918@smallexample
4919 je label
4920 popq %rbx
4921 .cfi_restore %rbx
4922 popq %r12
4923 .cfi_restore %r12
4924 popq %rbp
4925 .cfi_restore %rbp
4926 .cfi_def_cfa %rsp, 8
4927 ret
4928label:
4929 /* Do something else */
4930@end smallexample
4931
4932Here, we want the @code{.cfi} directives to affect only the rows corresponding
4933to the instructions before @code{label}. This means we'd have to add multiple
4934@code{.cfi} directives after @code{label} to recreate the original save
4935locations of the registers, as well as setting the CFA back to the value of
4936@code{rbp}. This would be clumsy, and result in a larger binary size. Instead,
4937we can write:
4938
4939@smallexample
4940 je label
4941 popq %rbx
4942 .cfi_remember_state
4943 .cfi_restore %rbx
4944 popq %r12
4945 .cfi_restore %r12
4946 popq %rbp
4947 .cfi_restore %rbp
4948 .cfi_def_cfa %rsp, 8
4949 ret
4950label:
4951 .cfi_restore_state
4952 /* Do something else */
4953@end smallexample
4954
4955That way, the rules for the instructions after @code{label} will be the same
4956as before the first @code{.cfi_restore} without having to use multiple
4957@code{.cfi} directives.
4958
4959@subsection @code{.cfi_return_column @var{register}}
4960Change return column @var{register}, i.e. the return address is either
4961directly in @var{register} or can be accessed by rules for @var{register}.
4962
4963@subsection @code{.cfi_signal_frame}
4964Mark current function as signal trampoline.
4965
4966@subsection @code{.cfi_window_save}
4967SPARC register window has been saved.
4968
4969@subsection @code{.cfi_escape} @var{expression}[, @dots{}]
4970Allows the user to add arbitrary bytes to the unwind info. One
4971might use this to add OS-specific CFI opcodes, or generic CFI
4972opcodes that GAS does not yet support.
4973
4974@subsection @code{.cfi_val_encoded_addr @var{register}, @var{encoding}, @var{label}}
4975The current value of @var{register} is @var{label}. The value of @var{label}
4976will be encoded in the output file according to @var{encoding}; see the
4977description of @code{.cfi_personality} for details on this encoding.
4978
4979The usefulness of equating a register to a fixed label is probably
4980limited to the return address register. Here, it can be useful to
4981mark a code segment that has only one return address which is reached
4982by a direct branch and no copy of the return address exists in memory
4983or another register.
4984
4985@node Comm
4986@section @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4987
4988@cindex @code{comm} directive
4989@cindex symbol, common
4990@code{.comm} declares a common symbol named @var{symbol}. When linking, a
4991common symbol in one object file may be merged with a defined or common symbol
4992of the same name in another object file. If @code{@value{LD}} does not see a
4993definition for the symbol--just one or more common symbols--then it will
4994allocate @var{length} bytes of uninitialized memory. @var{length} must be an
4995absolute expression. If @code{@value{LD}} sees multiple common symbols with
4996the same name, and they do not all have the same size, it will allocate space
4997using the largest size.
4998
4999@ifset COFF-ELF
5000When using ELF or (as a GNU extension) PE, the @code{.comm} directive takes
5001an optional third argument. This is the desired alignment of the symbol,
5002specified for ELF as a byte boundary (for example, an alignment of 16 means
5003that the least significant 4 bits of the address should be zero), and for PE
5004as a power of two (for example, an alignment of 5 means aligned to a 32-byte
5005boundary). The alignment must be an absolute expression, and it must be a
5006power of two. If @code{@value{LD}} allocates uninitialized memory for the
5007common symbol, it will use the alignment when placing the symbol. If no
5008alignment is specified, @command{@value{AS}} will set the alignment to the
5009largest power of two less than or equal to the size of the symbol, up to a
5010maximum of 16 on ELF, or the default section alignment of 4 on PE@footnote{This
5011is not the same as the executable image file alignment controlled by @code{@value{LD}}'s
5012@samp{--section-alignment} option; image file sections in PE are aligned to
5013multiples of 4096, which is far too large an alignment for ordinary variables.
5014It is rather the default alignment for (non-debug) sections within object
5015(@samp{*.o}) files, which are less strictly aligned.}.
5016@end ifset
5017
5018@ifset HPPA
5019The syntax for @code{.comm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
5020@samp{@var{symbol} .comm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
5021@end ifset
5022
5023@node Data
5024@section @code{.data @var{subsection}}
5025
5026@cindex @code{data} directive
5027@code{.data} tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the
5028end of the data subsection numbered @var{subsection} (which is an
5029absolute expression). If @var{subsection} is omitted, it defaults
5030to zero.
5031
5032@ifset COFF
5033@node Def
5034@section @code{.def @var{name}}
5035
5036@cindex @code{def} directive
5037@cindex COFF symbols, debugging
5038@cindex debugging COFF symbols
5039Begin defining debugging information for a symbol @var{name}; the
5040definition extends until the @code{.endef} directive is encountered.
5041@ifset BOUT
5042
5043This directive is only observed when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF
5044format output; when producing @code{b.out}, @samp{.def} is recognized,
5045but ignored.
5046@end ifset
5047@end ifset
5048
5049@ifset aout-bout
5050@node Desc
5051@section @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
5052
5053@cindex @code{desc} directive
5054@cindex COFF symbol descriptor
5055@cindex symbol descriptor, COFF
5056This directive sets the descriptor of the symbol (@pxref{Symbol Attributes})
5057to the low 16 bits of an absolute expression.
5058
5059@ifset COFF
5060The @samp{.desc} directive is not available when @command{@value{AS}} is
5061configured for COFF output; it is only for @code{a.out} or @code{b.out}
5062object format. For the sake of compatibility, @command{@value{AS}} accepts
5063it, but produces no output, when configured for COFF.
5064@end ifset
5065@end ifset
5066
5067@ifset COFF
5068@node Dim
5069@section @code{.dim}
5070
5071@cindex @code{dim} directive
5072@cindex COFF auxiliary symbol information
5073@cindex auxiliary symbol information, COFF
5074This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
5075information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
5076@code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.
5077@ifset BOUT
5078
5079@samp{.dim} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
5080@command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
5081ignores it.
5082@end ifset
5083@end ifset
5084
5085@node Double
5086@section @code{.double @var{flonums}}
5087
5088@cindex @code{double} directive
5089@cindex floating point numbers (double)
5090@code{.double} expects zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
5091assembles floating point numbers.
5092@ifset GENERIC
5093The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
5094@command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
5095@end ifset
5096@ifclear GENERIC
5097@ifset IEEEFLOAT
5098On the @value{TARGET} family @samp{.double} emits 64-bit floating-point numbers
5099in @sc{ieee} format.
5100@end ifset
5101@end ifclear
5102
5103@node Eject
5104@section @code{.eject}
5105
5106@cindex @code{eject} directive
5107@cindex new page, in listings
5108@cindex page, in listings
5109@cindex listing control: new page
5110Force a page break at this point, when generating assembly listings.
5111
5112@node Else
5113@section @code{.else}
5114
5115@cindex @code{else} directive
5116@code{.else} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
5117assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It marks the beginning of a section
5118of code to be assembled if the condition for the preceding @code{.if}
5119was false.
5120
5121@node Elseif
5122@section @code{.elseif}
5123
5124@cindex @code{elseif} directive
5125@code{.elseif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
5126assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It is shorthand for beginning a new
5127@code{.if} block that would otherwise fill the entire @code{.else} section.
5128
5129@node End
5130@section @code{.end}
5131
5132@cindex @code{end} directive
5133@code{.end} marks the end of the assembly file. @command{@value{AS}} does not
5134process anything in the file past the @code{.end} directive.
5135
5136@ifset COFF
5137@node Endef
5138@section @code{.endef}
5139
5140@cindex @code{endef} directive
5141This directive flags the end of a symbol definition begun with
5142@code{.def}.
5143@ifset BOUT
5144
5145@samp{.endef} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; if
5146@command{@value{AS}} is configured to generate @code{b.out}, it accepts this
5147directive but ignores it.
5148@end ifset
5149@end ifset
5150
5151@node Endfunc
5152@section @code{.endfunc}
5153@cindex @code{endfunc} directive
5154@code{.endfunc} marks the end of a function specified with @code{.func}.
5155
5156@node Endif
5157@section @code{.endif}
5158
5159@cindex @code{endif} directive
5160@code{.endif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional assembly;
5161it marks the end of a block of code that is only assembled
5162conditionally. @xref{If,,@code{.if}}.
5163
5164@node Equ
5165@section @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5166
5167@cindex @code{equ} directive
5168@cindex assigning values to symbols
5169@cindex symbols, assigning values to
5170This directive sets the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}.
5171It is synonymous with @samp{.set}; see @ref{Set,,@code{.set}}.
5172
5173@ifset HPPA
5174The syntax for @code{equ} on the HPPA is
5175@samp{@var{symbol} .equ @var{expression}}.
5176@end ifset
5177
5178@ifset Z80
5179The syntax for @code{equ} on the Z80 is
5180@samp{@var{symbol} equ @var{expression}}.
5181On the Z80 it is an eror if @var{symbol} is already defined,
5182but the symbol is not protected from later redefinition.
5183Compare @ref{Equiv}.
5184@end ifset
5185
5186@node Equiv
5187@section @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5188@cindex @code{equiv} directive
5189The @code{.equiv} directive is like @code{.equ} and @code{.set}, except that
5190the assembler will signal an error if @var{symbol} is already defined. Note a
5191symbol which has been referenced but not actually defined is considered to be
5192undefined.
5193
5194Except for the contents of the error message, this is roughly equivalent to
5195@smallexample
5196.ifdef SYM
5197.err
5198.endif
5199.equ SYM,VAL
5200@end smallexample
5201plus it protects the symbol from later redefinition.
5202
5203@node Eqv
5204@section @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5205@cindex @code{eqv} directive
5206The @code{.eqv} directive is like @code{.equiv}, but no attempt is made to
5207evaluate the expression or any part of it immediately. Instead each time
5208the resulting symbol is used in an expression, a snapshot of its current
5209value is taken.
5210
5211@node Err
5212@section @code{.err}
5213@cindex @code{err} directive
5214If @command{@value{AS}} assembles a @code{.err} directive, it will print an error
5215message and, unless the @option{-Z} option was used, it will not generate an
5216object file. This can be used to signal an error in conditionally compiled code.
5217
5218@node Error
5219@section @code{.error "@var{string}"}
5220@cindex error directive
5221
5222Similarly to @code{.err}, this directive emits an error, but you can specify a
5223string that will be emitted as the error message. If you don't specify the
5224message, it defaults to @code{".error directive invoked in source file"}.
5225@xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
5226
5227@smallexample
5228 .error "This code has not been assembled and tested."
5229@end smallexample
5230
5231@node Exitm
5232@section @code{.exitm}
5233Exit early from the current macro definition. @xref{Macro}.
5234
5235@node Extern
5236@section @code{.extern}
5237
5238@cindex @code{extern} directive
5239@code{.extern} is accepted in the source program---for compatibility
5240with other assemblers---but it is ignored. @command{@value{AS}} treats
5241all undefined symbols as external.
5242
5243@node Fail
5244@section @code{.fail @var{expression}}
5245
5246@cindex @code{fail} directive
5247Generates an error or a warning. If the value of the @var{expression} is 500
5248or more, @command{@value{AS}} will print a warning message. If the value is less
5249than 500, @command{@value{AS}} will print an error message. The message will
5250include the value of @var{expression}. This can occasionally be useful inside
5251complex nested macros or conditional assembly.
5252
5253@node File
5254@section @code{.file}
5255@cindex @code{file} directive
5256
5257@ifclear no-file-dir
5258There are two different versions of the @code{.file} directive. Targets
5259that support DWARF2 line number information use the DWARF2 version of
5260@code{.file}. Other targets use the default version.
5261
5262@subheading Default Version
5263
5264@cindex logical file name
5265@cindex file name, logical
5266This version of the @code{.file} directive tells @command{@value{AS}} that we
5267are about to start a new logical file. The syntax is:
5268
5269@smallexample
5270.file @var{string}
5271@end smallexample
5272
5273@var{string} is the new file name. In general, the filename is
5274recognized whether or not it is surrounded by quotes @samp{"}; but if you wish
5275to specify an empty file name, you must give the quotes--@code{""}. This
5276statement may go away in future: it is only recognized to be compatible with
5277old @command{@value{AS}} programs.
5278
5279@subheading DWARF2 Version
5280@end ifclear
5281
5282When emitting DWARF2 line number information, @code{.file} assigns filenames
5283to the @code{.debug_line} file name table. The syntax is:
5284
5285@smallexample
5286.file @var{fileno} @var{filename}
5287@end smallexample
5288
5289The @var{fileno} operand should be a unique positive integer to use as the
5290index of the entry in the table. The @var{filename} operand is a C string
5291literal.
5292
5293The detail of filename indices is exposed to the user because the filename
5294table is shared with the @code{.debug_info} section of the DWARF2 debugging
5295information, and thus the user must know the exact indices that table
5296entries will have.
5297
5298@node Fill
5299@section @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
5300
5301@cindex @code{fill} directive
5302@cindex writing patterns in memory
5303@cindex patterns, writing in memory
5304@var{repeat}, @var{size} and @var{value} are absolute expressions.
5305This emits @var{repeat} copies of @var{size} bytes. @var{Repeat}
5306may be zero or more. @var{Size} may be zero or more, but if it is
5307more than 8, then it is deemed to have the value 8, compatible with
5308other people's assemblers. The contents of each @var{repeat} bytes
5309is taken from an 8-byte number. The highest order 4 bytes are
5310zero. The lowest order 4 bytes are @var{value} rendered in the
5311byte-order of an integer on the computer @command{@value{AS}} is assembling for.
5312Each @var{size} bytes in a repetition is taken from the lowest order
5313@var{size} bytes of this number. Again, this bizarre behavior is
5314compatible with other people's assemblers.
5315
5316@var{size} and @var{value} are optional.
5317If the second comma and @var{value} are absent, @var{value} is
5318assumed zero. If the first comma and following tokens are absent,
5319@var{size} is assumed to be 1.
5320
5321@node Float
5322@section @code{.float @var{flonums}}
5323
5324@cindex floating point numbers (single)
5325@cindex @code{float} directive
5326This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
5327has the same effect as @code{.single}.
5328@ifset GENERIC
5329The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
5330@command{@value{AS}} is configured.
5331@xref{Machine Dependencies}.
5332@end ifset
5333@ifclear GENERIC
5334@ifset IEEEFLOAT
5335On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.float} emits 32-bit floating point numbers
5336in @sc{ieee} format.
5337@end ifset
5338@end ifclear
5339
5340@node Func
5341@section @code{.func @var{name}[,@var{label}]}
5342@cindex @code{func} directive
5343@code{.func} emits debugging information to denote function @var{name}, and
5344is ignored unless the file is assembled with debugging enabled.
5345Only @samp{--gstabs[+]} is currently supported.
5346@var{label} is the entry point of the function and if omitted @var{name}
5347prepended with the @samp{leading char} is used.
5348@samp{leading char} is usually @code{_} or nothing, depending on the target.
5349All functions are currently defined to have @code{void} return type.
5350The function must be terminated with @code{.endfunc}.
5351
5352@node Global
5353@section @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
5354
5355@cindex @code{global} directive
5356@cindex symbol, making visible to linker
5357@code{.global} makes the symbol visible to @code{@value{LD}}. If you define
5358@var{symbol} in your partial program, its value is made available to
5359other partial programs that are linked with it. Otherwise,
5360@var{symbol} takes its attributes from a symbol of the same name
5361from another file linked into the same program.
5362
5363Both spellings (@samp{.globl} and @samp{.global}) are accepted, for
5364compatibility with other assemblers.
5365
5366@ifset HPPA
5367On the HPPA, @code{.global} is not always enough to make it accessible to other
5368partial programs. You may need the HPPA-only @code{.EXPORT} directive as well.
5369@xref{HPPA Directives, ,HPPA Assembler Directives}.
5370@end ifset
5371
5372@ifset ELF
5373@node Gnu_attribute
5374@section @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
5375Record a @sc{gnu} object attribute for this file. @xref{Object Attributes}.
5376
5377@node Hidden
5378@section @code{.hidden @var{names}}
5379
5380@cindex @code{hidden} directive
5381@cindex visibility
5382This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5383@code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal,,@code{.internal}}) and
5384@code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5385
5386This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5387their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5388@code{hidden} which means that the symbols are not visible to other components.
5389Such symbols are always considered to be @code{protected} as well.
5390@end ifset
5391
5392@node hword
5393@section @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
5394
5395@cindex @code{hword} directive
5396@cindex integers, 16-bit
5397@cindex numbers, 16-bit
5398@cindex sixteen bit integers
5399This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
5400a 16 bit number for each.
5401
5402@ifset GENERIC
5403This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}; depending on the target
5404architecture, it may also be a synonym for @samp{.word}.
5405@end ifset
5406@ifclear GENERIC
5407@ifset W32
5408This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}.
5409@end ifset
5410@ifset W16
5411This directive is a synonym for both @samp{.short} and @samp{.word}.
5412@end ifset
5413@end ifclear
5414
5415@node Ident
5416@section @code{.ident}
5417
5418@cindex @code{ident} directive
5419
5420This directive is used by some assemblers to place tags in object files. The
5421behavior of this directive varies depending on the target. When using the
5422a.out object file format, @command{@value{AS}} simply accepts the directive for
5423source-file compatibility with existing assemblers, but does not emit anything
5424for it. When using COFF, comments are emitted to the @code{.comment} or
5425@code{.rdata} section, depending on the target. When using ELF, comments are
5426emitted to the @code{.comment} section.
5427
5428@node If
5429@section @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
5430
5431@cindex conditional assembly
5432@cindex @code{if} directive
5433@code{.if} marks the beginning of a section of code which is only
5434considered part of the source program being assembled if the argument
5435(which must be an @var{absolute expression}) is non-zero. The end of
5436the conditional section of code must be marked by @code{.endif}
5437(@pxref{Endif,,@code{.endif}}); optionally, you may include code for the
5438alternative condition, flagged by @code{.else} (@pxref{Else,,@code{.else}}).
5439If you have several conditions to check, @code{.elseif} may be used to avoid
5440nesting blocks if/else within each subsequent @code{.else} block.
5441
5442The following variants of @code{.if} are also supported:
5443@table @code
5444@cindex @code{ifdef} directive
5445@item .ifdef @var{symbol}
5446Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5447has been defined. Note a symbol which has been referenced but not yet defined
5448is considered to be undefined.
5449
5450@cindex @code{ifb} directive
5451@item .ifb @var{text}
5452Assembles the following section of code if the operand is blank (empty).
5453
5454@cindex @code{ifc} directive
5455@item .ifc @var{string1},@var{string2}
5456Assembles the following section of code if the two strings are the same. The
5457strings may be optionally quoted with single quotes. If they are not quoted,
5458the first string stops at the first comma, and the second string stops at the
5459end of the line. Strings which contain whitespace should be quoted. The
5460string comparison is case sensitive.
5461
5462@cindex @code{ifeq} directive
5463@item .ifeq @var{absolute expression}
5464Assembles the following section of code if the argument is zero.
5465
5466@cindex @code{ifeqs} directive
5467@item .ifeqs @var{string1},@var{string2}
5468Another form of @code{.ifc}. The strings must be quoted using double quotes.
5469
5470@cindex @code{ifge} directive
5471@item .ifge @var{absolute expression}
5472Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than or
5473equal to zero.
5474
5475@cindex @code{ifgt} directive
5476@item .ifgt @var{absolute expression}
5477Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than zero.
5478
5479@cindex @code{ifle} directive
5480@item .ifle @var{absolute expression}
5481Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than or equal
5482to zero.
5483
5484@cindex @code{iflt} directive
5485@item .iflt @var{absolute expression}
5486Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than zero.
5487
5488@cindex @code{ifnb} directive
5489@item .ifnb @var{text}
5490Like @code{.ifb}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5491following section of code if the operand is non-blank (non-empty).
5492
5493@cindex @code{ifnc} directive
5494@item .ifnc @var{string1},@var{string2}.
5495Like @code{.ifc}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5496following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5497
5498@cindex @code{ifndef} directive
5499@cindex @code{ifnotdef} directive
5500@item .ifndef @var{symbol}
5501@itemx .ifnotdef @var{symbol}
5502Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5503has not been defined. Both spelling variants are equivalent. Note a symbol
5504which has been referenced but not yet defined is considered to be undefined.
5505
5506@cindex @code{ifne} directive
5507@item .ifne @var{absolute expression}
5508Assembles the following section of code if the argument is not equal to zero
5509(in other words, this is equivalent to @code{.if}).
5510
5511@cindex @code{ifnes} directive
5512@item .ifnes @var{string1},@var{string2}
5513Like @code{.ifeqs}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5514following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5515@end table
5516
5517@node Incbin
5518@section @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
5519
5520@cindex @code{incbin} directive
5521@cindex binary files, including
5522The @code{incbin} directive includes @var{file} verbatim at the current
5523location. You can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line
5524option (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5525around @var{file}.
5526
5527The @var{skip} argument skips a number of bytes from the start of the
5528@var{file}. The @var{count} argument indicates the maximum number of bytes to
5529read. Note that the data is not aligned in any way, so it is the user's
5530responsibility to make sure that proper alignment is provided both before and
5531after the @code{incbin} directive.
5532
5533@node Include
5534@section @code{.include "@var{file}"}
5535
5536@cindex @code{include} directive
5537@cindex supporting files, including
5538@cindex files, including
5539This directive provides a way to include supporting files at specified
5540points in your source program. The code from @var{file} is assembled as
5541if it followed the point of the @code{.include}; when the end of the
5542included file is reached, assembly of the original file continues. You
5543can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line option
5544(@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5545around @var{file}.
5546
5547@node Int
5548@section @code{.int @var{expressions}}
5549
5550@cindex @code{int} directive
5551@cindex integers, 32-bit
5552Expect zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section, separated by commas.
5553For each expression, emit a number that, at run time, is the value of that
5554expression. The byte order and bit size of the number depends on what kind
5555of target the assembly is for.
5556
5557@ifclear GENERIC
5558@ifset H8
5559On most forms of the H8/300, @code{.int} emits 16-bit
5560integers. On the H8/300H and the Renesas SH, however, @code{.int} emits
556132-bit integers.
5562@end ifset
5563@end ifclear
5564
5565@ifset ELF
5566@node Internal
5567@section @code{.internal @var{names}}
5568
5569@cindex @code{internal} directive
5570@cindex visibility
5571This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5572@code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden,,@code{.hidden}}) and
5573@code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5574
5575This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5576their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5577@code{internal} which means that the symbols are considered to be @code{hidden}
5578(i.e., not visible to other components), and that some extra, processor specific
5579processing must also be performed upon the symbols as well.
5580@end ifset
5581
5582@node Irp
5583@section @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5584
5585@cindex @code{irp} directive
5586Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5587The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irp} directive, and is
5588terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each @var{value}, @var{symbol} is
5589set to @var{value}, and the sequence of statements is assembled. If no
5590@var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is assembled once, with
5591@var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to @var{symbol} within the
5592sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5593
5594For example, assembling
5595
5596@example
5597 .irp param,1,2,3
5598 move d\param,sp@@-
5599 .endr
5600@end example
5601
5602is equivalent to assembling
5603
5604@example
5605 move d1,sp@@-
5606 move d2,sp@@-
5607 move d3,sp@@-
5608@end example
5609
5610For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also @ref{Macro}.
5611
5612@node Irpc
5613@section @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5614
5615@cindex @code{irpc} directive
5616Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5617The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irpc} directive, and is
5618terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each character in @var{value},
5619@var{symbol} is set to the character, and the sequence of statements is
5620assembled. If no @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is
5621assembled once, with @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to
5622@var{symbol} within the sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5623
5624For example, assembling
5625
5626@example
5627 .irpc param,123
5628 move d\param,sp@@-
5629 .endr
5630@end example
5631
5632is equivalent to assembling
5633
5634@example
5635 move d1,sp@@-
5636 move d2,sp@@-
5637 move d3,sp@@-
5638@end example
5639
5640For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also the discussion
5641at @xref{Macro}.
5642
5643@node Lcomm
5644@section @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
5645
5646@cindex @code{lcomm} directive
5647@cindex local common symbols
5648@cindex symbols, local common
5649Reserve @var{length} (an absolute expression) bytes for a local common
5650denoted by @var{symbol}. The section and value of @var{symbol} are
5651those of the new local common. The addresses are allocated in the bss
5652section, so that at run-time the bytes start off zeroed. @var{Symbol}
5653is not declared global (@pxref{Global,,@code{.global}}), so is normally
5654not visible to @code{@value{LD}}.
5655
5656@ifset GENERIC
5657Some targets permit a third argument to be used with @code{.lcomm}. This
5658argument specifies the desired alignment of the symbol in the bss section.
5659@end ifset
5660
5661@ifset HPPA
5662The syntax for @code{.lcomm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
5663@samp{@var{symbol} .lcomm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
5664@end ifset
5665
5666@node Lflags
5667@section @code{.lflags}
5668
5669@cindex @code{lflags} directive (ignored)
5670@command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive, for compatibility with other
5671assemblers, but ignores it.
5672
5673@ifclear no-line-dir
5674@node Line
5675@section @code{.line @var{line-number}}
5676
5677@cindex @code{line} directive
5678@cindex logical line number
5679@ifset aout-bout
5680Change the logical line number. @var{line-number} must be an absolute
5681expression. The next line has that logical line number. Therefore any other
5682statements on the current line (after a statement separator character) are
5683reported as on logical line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1. One day
5684@command{@value{AS}} will no longer support this directive: it is recognized only
5685for compatibility with existing assembler programs.
5686@end ifset
5687
5688Even though this is a directive associated with the @code{a.out} or
5689@code{b.out} object-code formats, @command{@value{AS}} still recognizes it
5690when producing COFF output, and treats @samp{.line} as though it
5691were the COFF @samp{.ln} @emph{if} it is found outside a
5692@code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair.
5693
5694Inside a @code{.def}, @samp{.line} is, instead, one of the directives
5695used by compilers to generate auxiliary symbol information for
5696debugging.
5697@end ifclear
5698
5699@node Linkonce
5700@section @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
5701@cindex COMDAT
5702@cindex @code{linkonce} directive
5703@cindex common sections
5704Mark the current section so that the linker only includes a single copy of it.
5705This may be used to include the same section in several different object files,
5706but ensure that the linker will only include it once in the final output file.
5707The @code{.linkonce} pseudo-op must be used for each instance of the section.
5708Duplicate sections are detected based on the section name, so it should be
5709unique.
5710
5711This directive is only supported by a few object file formats; as of this
5712writing, the only object file format which supports it is the Portable
5713Executable format used on Windows NT.
5714
5715The @var{type} argument is optional. If specified, it must be one of the
5716following strings. For example:
5717@smallexample
5718.linkonce same_size
5719@end smallexample
5720Not all types may be supported on all object file formats.
5721
5722@table @code
5723@item discard
5724Silently discard duplicate sections. This is the default.
5725
5726@item one_only
5727Warn if there are duplicate sections, but still keep only one copy.
5728
5729@item same_size
5730Warn if any of the duplicates have different sizes.
5731
5732@item same_contents
5733Warn if any of the duplicates do not have exactly the same contents.
5734@end table
5735
5736@node List
5737@section @code{.list}
5738
5739@cindex @code{list} directive
5740@cindex listing control, turning on
5741Control (in conjunction with the @code{.nolist} directive) whether or
5742not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
5743internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
5744counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
5745generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5746
5747By default, listings are disabled. When you enable them (with the
5748@samp{-a} command line option; @pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}),
5749the initial value of the listing counter is one.
5750
5751@node Ln
5752@section @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
5753
5754@cindex @code{ln} directive
5755@ifclear no-line-dir
5756@samp{.ln} is a synonym for @samp{.line}.
5757@end ifclear
5758@ifset no-line-dir
5759Tell @command{@value{AS}} to change the logical line number. @var{line-number}
5760must be an absolute expression. The next line has that logical
5761line number, so any other statements on the current line (after a
5762statement separator character @code{;}) are reported as on logical
5763line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1.
5764@ifset BOUT
5765
5766This directive is accepted, but ignored, when @command{@value{AS}} is
5767configured for @code{b.out}; its effect is only associated with COFF
5768output format.
5769@end ifset
5770@end ifset
5771
5772@node Loc
5773@section @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno} [@var{column}] [@var{options}]}
5774@cindex @code{loc} directive
5775When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5776the @code{.loc} directive will add a row to the @code{.debug_line} line
5777number matrix corresponding to the immediately following assembly
5778instruction. The @var{fileno}, @var{lineno}, and optional @var{column}
5779arguments will be applied to the @code{.debug_line} state machine before
5780the row is added.
5781
5782The @var{options} are a sequence of the following tokens in any order:
5783
5784@table @code
5785@item basic_block
5786This option will set the @code{basic_block} register in the
5787@code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5788
5789@item prologue_end
5790This option will set the @code{prologue_end} register in the
5791@code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5792
5793@item epilogue_begin
5794This option will set the @code{epilogue_begin} register in the
5795@code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5796
5797@item is_stmt @var{value}
5798This option will set the @code{is_stmt} register in the
5799@code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{value}, which must be
5800either 0 or 1.
5801
5802@item isa @var{value}
5803This directive will set the @code{isa} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5804state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5805
5806@item discriminator @var{value}
5807This directive will set the @code{discriminator} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5808state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5809
5810@end table
5811
5812@node Loc_mark_labels
5813@section @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
5814@cindex @code{loc_mark_labels} directive
5815When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5816the @code{.loc_mark_labels} directive makes the assembler emit an entry
5817to the @code{.debug_line} line number matrix with the @code{basic_block}
5818register in the state machine set whenever a code label is seen.
5819The @var{enable} argument should be either 1 or 0, to enable or disable
5820this function respectively.
5821
5822@ifset ELF
5823@node Local
5824@section @code{.local @var{names}}
5825
5826@cindex @code{local} directive
5827This directive, which is available for ELF targets, marks each symbol in
5828the comma-separated list of @code{names} as a local symbol so that it
5829will not be externally visible. If the symbols do not already exist,
5830they will be created.
5831
5832For targets where the @code{.lcomm} directive (@pxref{Lcomm}) does not
5833accept an alignment argument, which is the case for most ELF targets,
5834the @code{.local} directive can be used in combination with @code{.comm}
5835(@pxref{Comm}) to define aligned local common data.
5836@end ifset
5837
5838@node Long
5839@section @code{.long @var{expressions}}
5840
5841@cindex @code{long} directive
5842@code{.long} is the same as @samp{.int}. @xref{Int,,@code{.int}}.
5843
5844@ignore
5845@c no one seems to know what this is for or whether this description is
5846@c what it really ought to do
5847@node Lsym
5848@section @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5849
5850@cindex @code{lsym} directive
5851@cindex symbol, not referenced in assembly
5852@code{.lsym} creates a new symbol named @var{symbol}, but does not put it in
5853the hash table, ensuring it cannot be referenced by name during the
5854rest of the assembly. This sets the attributes of the symbol to be
5855the same as the expression value:
5856@smallexample
5857@var{other} = @var{descriptor} = 0
5858@var{type} = @r{(section of @var{expression})}
5859@var{value} = @var{expression}
5860@end smallexample
5861@noindent
5862The new symbol is not flagged as external.
5863@end ignore
5864
5865@node Macro
5866@section @code{.macro}
5867
5868@cindex macros
5869The commands @code{.macro} and @code{.endm} allow you to define macros that
5870generate assembly output. For example, this definition specifies a macro
5871@code{sum} that puts a sequence of numbers into memory:
5872
5873@example
5874 .macro sum from=0, to=5
5875 .long \from
5876 .if \to-\from
5877 sum "(\from+1)",\to
5878 .endif
5879 .endm
5880@end example
5881
5882@noindent
5883With that definition, @samp{SUM 0,5} is equivalent to this assembly input:
5884
5885@example
5886 .long 0
5887 .long 1
5888 .long 2
5889 .long 3
5890 .long 4
5891 .long 5
5892@end example
5893
5894@ftable @code
5895@item .macro @var{macname}
5896@itemx .macro @var{macname} @var{macargs} @dots{}
5897@cindex @code{macro} directive
5898Begin the definition of a macro called @var{macname}. If your macro
5899definition requires arguments, specify their names after the macro name,
5900separated by commas or spaces. You can qualify the macro argument to
5901indicate whether all invocations must specify a non-blank value (through
5902@samp{:@code{req}}), or whether it takes all of the remaining arguments
5903(through @samp{:@code{vararg}}). You can supply a default value for any
5904macro argument by following the name with @samp{=@var{deflt}}. You
5905cannot define two macros with the same @var{macname} unless it has been
5906subject to the @code{.purgem} directive (@pxref{Purgem}) between the two
5907definitions. For example, these are all valid @code{.macro} statements:
5908
5909@table @code
5910@item .macro comm
5911Begin the definition of a macro called @code{comm}, which takes no
5912arguments.
5913
5914@item .macro plus1 p, p1
5915@itemx .macro plus1 p p1
5916Either statement begins the definition of a macro called @code{plus1},
5917which takes two arguments; within the macro definition, write
5918@samp{\p} or @samp{\p1} to evaluate the arguments.
5919
5920@item .macro reserve_str p1=0 p2
5921Begin the definition of a macro called @code{reserve_str}, with two
5922arguments. The first argument has a default value, but not the second.
5923After the definition is complete, you can call the macro either as
5924@samp{reserve_str @var{a},@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating to
5925@var{a} and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}), or as @samp{reserve_str
5926,@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating as the default, in this case
5927@samp{0}, and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}).
5928
5929@item .macro m p1:req, p2=0, p3:vararg
5930Begin the definition of a macro called @code{m}, with at least three
5931arguments. The first argument must always have a value specified, but
5932not the second, which instead has a default value. The third formal
5933will get assigned all remaining arguments specified at invocation time.
5934
5935When you call a macro, you can specify the argument values either by
5936position, or by keyword. For example, @samp{sum 9,17} is equivalent to
5937@samp{sum to=17, from=9}.
5938
5939@end table
5940
5941Note that since each of the @var{macargs} can be an identifier exactly
5942as any other one permitted by the target architecture, there may be
5943occasional problems if the target hand-crafts special meanings to certain
5944characters when they occur in a special position. For example, if the colon
5945(@code{:}) is generally permitted to be part of a symbol name, but the
5946architecture specific code special-cases it when occurring as the final
5947character of a symbol (to denote a label), then the macro parameter
5948replacement code will have no way of knowing that and consider the whole
5949construct (including the colon) an identifier, and check only this
5950identifier for being the subject to parameter substitution. So for example
5951this macro definition:
5952
5953@example
5954 .macro label l
5955\l:
5956 .endm
5957@end example
5958
5959might not work as expected. Invoking @samp{label foo} might not create a label
5960called @samp{foo} but instead just insert the text @samp{\l:} into the
5961assembler source, probably generating an error about an unrecognised
5962identifier.
5963
5964Similarly problems might occur with the period character (@samp{.})
5965which is often allowed inside opcode names (and hence identifier names). So
5966for example constructing a macro to build an opcode from a base name and a
5967length specifier like this:
5968
5969@example
5970 .macro opcode base length
5971 \base.\length
5972 .endm
5973@end example
5974
5975and invoking it as @samp{opcode store l} will not create a @samp{store.l}
5976instruction but instead generate some kind of error as the assembler tries to
5977interpret the text @samp{\base.\length}.
5978
5979There are several possible ways around this problem:
5980
5981@table @code
5982@item Insert white space
5983If it is possible to use white space characters then this is the simplest
5984solution. eg:
5985
5986@example
5987 .macro label l
5988\l :
5989 .endm
5990@end example
5991
5992@item Use @samp{\()}
5993The string @samp{\()} can be used to separate the end of a macro argument from
5994the following text. eg:
5995
5996@example
5997 .macro opcode base length
5998 \base\().\length
5999 .endm
6000@end example
6001
6002@item Use the alternate macro syntax mode
6003In the alternative macro syntax mode the ampersand character (@samp{&}) can be
6004used as a separator. eg:
6005
6006@example
6007 .altmacro
6008 .macro label l
6009l&:
6010 .endm
6011@end example
6012@end table
6013
6014Note: this problem of correctly identifying string parameters to pseudo ops
6015also applies to the identifiers used in @code{.irp} (@pxref{Irp})
6016and @code{.irpc} (@pxref{Irpc}) as well.
6017
6018@item .endm
6019@cindex @code{endm} directive
6020Mark the end of a macro definition.
6021
6022@item .exitm
6023@cindex @code{exitm} directive
6024Exit early from the current macro definition.
6025
6026@cindex number of macros executed
6027@cindex macros, count executed
6028@item \@@
6029@command{@value{AS}} maintains a counter of how many macros it has
6030executed in this pseudo-variable; you can copy that number to your
6031output with @samp{\@@}, but @emph{only within a macro definition}.
6032
6033@item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
6034@emph{Warning: @code{LOCAL} is only available if you select ``alternate
6035macro syntax'' with @samp{--alternate} or @code{.altmacro}.}
6036@xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
6037@end ftable
6038
6039@node MRI
6040@section @code{.mri @var{val}}
6041
6042@cindex @code{mri} directive
6043@cindex MRI mode, temporarily
6044If @var{val} is non-zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to enter MRI mode. If
6045@var{val} is zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to exit MRI mode. This change
6046affects code assembled until the next @code{.mri} directive, or until the end
6047of the file. @xref{M, MRI mode, MRI mode}.
6048
6049@node Noaltmacro
6050@section @code{.noaltmacro}
6051Disable alternate macro mode. @xref{Altmacro}.
6052
6053@node Nolist
6054@section @code{.nolist}
6055
6056@cindex @code{nolist} directive
6057@cindex listing control, turning off
6058Control (in conjunction with the @code{.list} directive) whether or
6059not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
6060internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
6061counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
6062generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
6063
6064@node Octa
6065@section @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
6066
6067@c FIXME: double size emitted for "octa" on i960, others? Or warn?
6068@cindex @code{octa} directive
6069@cindex integer, 16-byte
6070@cindex sixteen byte integer
6071This directive expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For each
6072bignum, it emits a 16-byte integer.
6073
6074The term ``octa'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
6075hence @emph{octa}-word for 16 bytes.
6076
6077@node Offset
6078@section @code{.offset @var{loc}}
6079
6080@cindex @code{offset} directive
6081Set the location counter to @var{loc} in the absolute section. @var{loc} must
6082be an absolute expression. This directive may be useful for defining
6083symbols with absolute values. Do not confuse it with the @code{.org}
6084directive.
6085
6086@node Org
6087@section @code{.org @var{new-lc} , @var{fill}}
6088
6089@cindex @code{org} directive
6090@cindex location counter, advancing
6091@cindex advancing location counter
6092@cindex current address, advancing
6093Advance the location counter of the current section to
6094@var{new-lc}. @var{new-lc} is either an absolute expression or an
6095expression with the same section as the current subsection. That is,
6096you can't use @code{.org} to cross sections: if @var{new-lc} has the
6097wrong section, the @code{.org} directive is ignored. To be compatible
6098with former assemblers, if the section of @var{new-lc} is absolute,
6099@command{@value{AS}} issues a warning, then pretends the section of @var{new-lc}
6100is the same as the current subsection.
6101
6102@code{.org} may only increase the location counter, or leave it
6103unchanged; you cannot use @code{.org} to move the location counter
6104backwards.
6105
6106@c double negative used below "not undefined" because this is a specific
6107@c reference to "undefined" (as SEG_UNKNOWN is called in this manual)
6108@c section. doc@cygnus.com 18feb91
6109Because @command{@value{AS}} tries to assemble programs in one pass, @var{new-lc}
6110may not be undefined. If you really detest this restriction we eagerly await
6111a chance to share your improved assembler.
6112
6113Beware that the origin is relative to the start of the section, not
6114to the start of the subsection. This is compatible with other
6115people's assemblers.
6116
6117When the location counter (of the current subsection) is advanced, the
6118intervening bytes are filled with @var{fill} which should be an
6119absolute expression. If the comma and @var{fill} are omitted,
6120@var{fill} defaults to zero.
6121
6122@node P2align
6123@section @code{.p2align[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
6124
6125@cindex padding the location counter given a power of two
6126@cindex @code{p2align} directive
6127Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
6128storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
6129number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
6130advancement. For example @samp{.p2align 3} advances the location
6131counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
6132multiple of 8, no change is needed.
6133
6134The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
6135padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
6136padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
6137marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
6138with no-op instructions.
6139
6140The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
6141it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
6142directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
6143specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
6144fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
6145required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
6146with no-op instructions when appropriate.
6147
6148@cindex @code{p2alignw} directive
6149@cindex @code{p2alignl} directive
6150The @code{.p2alignw} and @code{.p2alignl} directives are variants of the
6151@code{.p2align} directive. The @code{.p2alignw} directive treats the fill
6152pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.p2alignl} directives treats the
6153fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.p2alignw
61542,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
6155filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
6156the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
6157undefined.
6158
6159@ifset ELF
6160@node PopSection
6161@section @code{.popsection}
6162
6163@cindex @code{popsection} directive
6164@cindex Section Stack
6165This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6166@code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6167@code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.previous}
6168(@pxref{Previous}).
6169
6170This directive replaces the current section (and subsection) with the top
6171section (and subsection) on the section stack. This section is popped off the
6172stack.
6173@end ifset
6174
6175@ifset ELF
6176@node Previous
6177@section @code{.previous}
6178
6179@cindex @code{previous} directive
6180@cindex Section Stack
6181This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6182@code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6183@code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.popsection}
6184(@pxref{PopSection}).
6185
6186This directive swaps the current section (and subsection) with most recently
6187referenced section/subsection pair prior to this one. Multiple
6188@code{.previous} directives in a row will flip between two sections (and their
6189subsections). For example:
6190
6191@smallexample
6192.section A
6193 .subsection 1
6194 .word 0x1234
6195 .subsection 2
6196 .word 0x5678
6197.previous
6198 .word 0x9abc
6199@end smallexample
6200
6201Will place 0x1234 and 0x9abc into subsection 1 and 0x5678 into subsection 2 of
6202section A. Whilst:
6203
6204@smallexample
6205.section A
6206.subsection 1
6207 # Now in section A subsection 1
6208 .word 0x1234
6209.section B
6210.subsection 0
6211 # Now in section B subsection 0
6212 .word 0x5678
6213.subsection 1
6214 # Now in section B subsection 1
6215 .word 0x9abc
6216.previous
6217 # Now in section B subsection 0
6218 .word 0xdef0
6219@end smallexample
6220
6221Will place 0x1234 into section A, 0x5678 and 0xdef0 into subsection 0 of
6222section B and 0x9abc into subsection 1 of section B.
6223
6224In terms of the section stack, this directive swaps the current section with
6225the top section on the section stack.
6226@end ifset
6227
6228@node Print
6229@section @code{.print @var{string}}
6230
6231@cindex @code{print} directive
6232@command{@value{AS}} will print @var{string} on the standard output during
6233assembly. You must put @var{string} in double quotes.
6234
6235@ifset ELF
6236@node Protected
6237@section @code{.protected @var{names}}
6238
6239@cindex @code{protected} directive
6240@cindex visibility
6241This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
6242@code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden}) and @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal}).
6243
6244This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
6245their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
6246@code{protected} which means that any references to the symbols from within the
6247components that defines them must be resolved to the definition in that
6248component, even if a definition in another component would normally preempt
6249this.
6250@end ifset
6251
6252@node Psize
6253@section @code{.psize @var{lines} , @var{columns}}
6254
6255@cindex @code{psize} directive
6256@cindex listing control: paper size
6257@cindex paper size, for listings
6258Use this directive to declare the number of lines---and, optionally, the
6259number of columns---to use for each page, when generating listings.
6260
6261If you do not use @code{.psize}, listings use a default line-count
6262of 60. You may omit the comma and @var{columns} specification; the
6263default width is 200 columns.
6264
6265@command{@value{AS}} generates formfeeds whenever the specified number of
6266lines is exceeded (or whenever you explicitly request one, using
6267@code{.eject}).
6268
6269If you specify @var{lines} as @code{0}, no formfeeds are generated save
6270those explicitly specified with @code{.eject}.
6271
6272@node Purgem
6273@section @code{.purgem @var{name}}
6274
6275@cindex @code{purgem} directive
6276Undefine the macro @var{name}, so that later uses of the string will not be
6277expanded. @xref{Macro}.
6278
6279@ifset ELF
6280@node PushSection
6281@section @code{.pushsection @var{name} [, @var{subsection}] [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{arguments}]]]}
6282
6283@cindex @code{pushsection} directive
6284@cindex Section Stack
6285This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6286@code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6287@code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6288(@pxref{Previous}).
6289
6290This directive pushes the current section (and subsection) onto the
6291top of the section stack, and then replaces the current section and
6292subsection with @code{name} and @code{subsection}. The optional
6293@code{flags}, @code{type} and @code{arguments} are treated the same
6294as in the @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}) directive.
6295@end ifset
6296
6297@node Quad
6298@section @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
6299
6300@cindex @code{quad} directive
6301@code{.quad} expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For
6302each bignum, it emits
6303@ifclear bignum-16
6304an 8-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 8 bytes, it prints a
6305warning message; and just takes the lowest order 8 bytes of the bignum.
6306@cindex eight-byte integer
6307@cindex integer, 8-byte
6308
6309The term ``quad'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
6310hence @emph{quad}-word for 8 bytes.
6311@end ifclear
6312@ifset bignum-16
6313a 16-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 16 bytes, it prints a
6314warning message; and just takes the lowest order 16 bytes of the bignum.
6315@cindex sixteen-byte integer
6316@cindex integer, 16-byte
6317@end ifset
6318
6319@node Reloc
6320@section @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
6321
6322@cindex @code{reloc} directive
6323Generate a relocation at @var{offset} of type @var{reloc_name} with value
6324@var{expression}. If @var{offset} is a number, the relocation is generated in
6325the current section. If @var{offset} is an expression that resolves to a
6326symbol plus offset, the relocation is generated in the given symbol's section.
6327@var{expression}, if present, must resolve to a symbol plus addend or to an
6328absolute value, but note that not all targets support an addend. e.g. ELF REL
6329targets such as i386 store an addend in the section contents rather than in the
6330relocation. This low level interface does not support addends stored in the
6331section.
6332
6333@node Rept
6334@section @code{.rept @var{count}}
6335
6336@cindex @code{rept} directive
6337Repeat the sequence of lines between the @code{.rept} directive and the next
6338@code{.endr} directive @var{count} times.
6339
6340For example, assembling
6341
6342@example
6343 .rept 3
6344 .long 0
6345 .endr
6346@end example
6347
6348is equivalent to assembling
6349
6350@example
6351 .long 0
6352 .long 0
6353 .long 0
6354@end example
6355
6356@node Sbttl
6357@section @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
6358
6359@cindex @code{sbttl} directive
6360@cindex subtitles for listings
6361@cindex listing control: subtitle
6362Use @var{subheading} as the title (third line, immediately after the
6363title line) when generating assembly listings.
6364
6365This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
6366it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
6367
6368@ifset COFF
6369@node Scl
6370@section @code{.scl @var{class}}
6371
6372@cindex @code{scl} directive
6373@cindex symbol storage class (COFF)
6374@cindex COFF symbol storage class
6375Set the storage-class value for a symbol. This directive may only be
6376used inside a @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair. Storage class may flag
6377whether a symbol is static or external, or it may record further
6378symbolic debugging information.
6379@ifset BOUT
6380
6381The @samp{.scl} directive is primarily associated with COFF output; when
6382configured to generate @code{b.out} output format, @command{@value{AS}}
6383accepts this directive but ignores it.
6384@end ifset
6385@end ifset
6386
6387@ifset COFF-ELF
6388@node Section
6389@section @code{.section @var{name}}
6390
6391@cindex named section
6392Use the @code{.section} directive to assemble the following code into a section
6393named @var{name}.
6394
6395This directive is only supported for targets that actually support arbitrarily
6396named sections; on @code{a.out} targets, for example, it is not accepted, even
6397with a standard @code{a.out} section name.
6398
6399@ifset COFF
6400@ifset ELF
6401@c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6402@subheading COFF Version
6403@end ifset
6404
6405@cindex @code{section} directive (COFF version)
6406For COFF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used in one of the following
6407ways:
6408
6409@smallexample
6410.section @var{name}[, "@var{flags}"]
6411.section @var{name}[, @var{subsection}]
6412@end smallexample
6413
6414If the optional argument is quoted, it is taken as flags to use for the
6415section. Each flag is a single character. The following flags are recognized:
6416
6417@table @code
6418@item b
6419bss section (uninitialized data)
6420@item n
6421section is not loaded
6422@item w
6423writable section
6424@item d
6425data section
6426@item e
6427exclude section from linking
6428@item r
6429read-only section
6430@item x
6431executable section
6432@item s
6433shared section (meaningful for PE targets)
6434@item a
6435ignored. (For compatibility with the ELF version)
6436@item y
6437section is not readable (meaningful for PE targets)
6438@item 0-9
6439single-digit power-of-two section alignment (GNU extension)
6440@end table
6441
6442If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6443the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to be
6444loaded and writable. Note the @code{n} and @code{w} flags remove attributes
6445from the section, rather than adding them, so if they are used on their own it
6446will be as if no flags had been specified at all.
6447
6448If the optional argument to the @code{.section} directive is not quoted, it is
6449taken as a subsection number (@pxref{Sub-Sections}).
6450@end ifset
6451
6452@ifset ELF
6453@ifset COFF
6454@c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6455@subheading ELF Version
6456@end ifset
6457
6458@cindex Section Stack
6459This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6460@code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}), @code{.pushsection}
6461(@pxref{PushSection}), @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and
6462@code{.previous} (@pxref{Previous}).
6463
6464@cindex @code{section} directive (ELF version)
6465For ELF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used like this:
6466
6467@smallexample
6468.section @var{name} [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{flag_specific_arguments}]]]
6469@end smallexample
6470
6471@anchor{Section Name Substitutions}
6472@kindex --sectname-subst
6473@cindex section name substitution
6474If the @samp{--sectname-subst} command-line option is provided, the @var{name}
6475argument may contain a substitution sequence. Only @code{%S} is supported
6476at the moment, and substitutes the current section name. For example:
6477
6478@smallexample
6479.macro exception_code
6480.section %S.exception
6481[exception code here]
6482.previous
6483.endm
6484
6485.text
6486[code]
6487exception_code
6488[...]
6489
6490.section .init
6491[init code]
6492exception_code
6493[...]
6494@end smallexample
6495
6496The two @code{exception_code} invocations above would create the
6497@code{.text.exception} and @code{.init.exception} sections respectively.
6498This is useful e.g. to discriminate between anciliary sections that are
6499tied to setup code to be discarded after use from anciliary sections that
6500need to stay resident without having to define multiple @code{exception_code}
6501macros just for that purpose.
6502
6503The optional @var{flags} argument is a quoted string which may contain any
6504combination of the following characters:
6505
6506@table @code
6507@item a
6508section is allocatable
6509@item e
6510section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6511@item w
6512section is writable
6513@item x
6514section is executable
6515@item M
6516section is mergeable
6517@item S
6518section contains zero terminated strings
6519@item G
6520section is a member of a section group
6521@item T
6522section is used for thread-local-storage
6523@item ?
6524section is a member of the previously-current section's group, if any
6525@item @code{<number>}
6526a numeric value indicating the bits to be set in the ELF section header's flags
6527field. Note - if one or more of the alphabetic characters described above is
6528also included in the flags field, their bit values will be ORed into the
6529resulting value.
6530@item @code{<target specific>}
6531some targets extend this list with their own flag characters
6532@end table
6533
6534Note - once a section's flags have been set they cannot be changed. There are
6535a few exceptions to this rule however. Processor and application specific
6536flags can be added to an already defined section. The @code{.interp},
6537@code{.strtab} and @code{.symtab} sections can have the allocate flag
6538(@code{a}) set after they are initially defined, and the @code{.note-GNU-stack}
6539section may have the executable (@code{x}) flag added.
6540
6541The optional @var{type} argument may contain one of the following constants:
6542
6543@table @code
6544@item @@progbits
6545section contains data
6546@item @@nobits
6547section does not contain data (i.e., section only occupies space)
6548@item @@note
6549section contains data which is used by things other than the program
6550@item @@init_array
6551section contains an array of pointers to init functions
6552@item @@fini_array
6553section contains an array of pointers to finish functions
6554@item @@preinit_array
6555section contains an array of pointers to pre-init functions
6556@item @@@code{<number>}
6557a numeric value to be set as the ELF section header's type field.
6558@item @@@code{<target specific>}
6559some targets extend this list with their own types
6560@end table
6561
6562Many targets only support the first three section types. The type may be
6563enclosed in double quotes if necessary.
6564
6565Note on targets where the @code{@@} character is the start of a comment (eg
6566ARM) then another character is used instead. For example the ARM port uses the
6567@code{%} character.
6568
6569Note - some sections, eg @code{.text} and @code{.data} are considered to be
6570special and have fixed types. Any attempt to declare them with a different
6571type will generate an error from the assembler.
6572
6573If @var{flags} contains the @code{M} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6574be specified as well as an extra argument---@var{entsize}---like this:
6575
6576@smallexample
6577.section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"M, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}
6578@end smallexample
6579
6580Sections with the @code{M} flag but not @code{S} flag must contain fixed size
6581constants, each @var{entsize} octets long. Sections with both @code{M} and
6582@code{S} must contain zero terminated strings where each character is
6583@var{entsize} bytes long. The linker may remove duplicates within sections with
6584the same name, same entity size and same flags. @var{entsize} must be an
6585absolute expression. For sections with both @code{M} and @code{S}, a string
6586which is a suffix of a larger string is considered a duplicate. Thus
6587@code{"def"} will be merged with @code{"abcdef"}; A reference to the first
6588@code{"def"} will be changed to a reference to @code{"abcdef"+3}.
6589
6590If @var{flags} contains the @code{G} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6591be present along with an additional field like this:
6592
6593@smallexample
6594.section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"G, @@@var{type}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6595@end smallexample
6596
6597The @var{GroupName} field specifies the name of the section group to which this
6598particular section belongs. The optional linkage field can contain:
6599
6600@table @code
6601@item comdat
6602indicates that only one copy of this section should be retained
6603@item .gnu.linkonce
6604an alias for comdat
6605@end table
6606
6607Note: if both the @var{M} and @var{G} flags are present then the fields for
6608the Merge flag should come first, like this:
6609
6610@smallexample
6611.section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"MG, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6612@end smallexample
6613
6614If @var{flags} contains the @code{?} symbol then it may not also contain the
6615@code{G} symbol and the @var{GroupName} or @var{linkage} fields should not be
6616present. Instead, @code{?} says to consider the section that's current before
6617this directive. If that section used @code{G}, then the new section will use
6618@code{G} with those same @var{GroupName} and @var{linkage} fields implicitly.
6619If not, then the @code{?} symbol has no effect.
6620
6621If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6622the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to have
6623none of the above flags: it will not be allocated in memory, nor writable, nor
6624executable. The section will contain data.
6625
6626For ELF targets, the assembler supports another type of @code{.section}
6627directive for compatibility with the Solaris assembler:
6628
6629@smallexample
6630.section "@var{name}"[, @var{flags}...]
6631@end smallexample
6632
6633Note that the section name is quoted. There may be a sequence of comma
6634separated flags:
6635
6636@table @code
6637@item #alloc
6638section is allocatable
6639@item #write
6640section is writable
6641@item #execinstr
6642section is executable
6643@item #exclude
6644section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6645@item #tls
6646section is used for thread local storage
6647@end table
6648
6649This directive replaces the current section and subsection. See the
6650contents of the gas testsuite directory @code{gas/testsuite/gas/elf} for
6651some examples of how this directive and the other section stack directives
6652work.
6653@end ifset
6654@end ifset
6655
6656@node Set
6657@section @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
6658
6659@cindex @code{set} directive
6660@cindex symbol value, setting
6661Set the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}. This
6662changes @var{symbol}'s value and type to conform to
6663@var{expression}. If @var{symbol} was flagged as external, it remains
6664flagged (@pxref{Symbol Attributes}).
6665
6666You may @code{.set} a symbol many times in the same assembly provided that the
6667values given to the symbol are constants. Values that are based on expressions
6668involving other symbols are allowed, but some targets may restrict this to only
6669being done once per assembly. This is because those targets do not set the
6670addresses of symbols at assembly time, but rather delay the assignment until a
6671final link is performed. This allows the linker a chance to change the code in
6672the files, changing the location of, and the relative distance between, various
6673different symbols.
6674
6675If you @code{.set} a global symbol, the value stored in the object
6676file is the last value stored into it.
6677
6678@ifset Z80
6679On Z80 @code{set} is a real instruction, use
6680@samp{@var{symbol} defl @var{expression}} instead.
6681@end ifset
6682
6683@node Short
6684@section @code{.short @var{expressions}}
6685
6686@cindex @code{short} directive
6687@ifset GENERIC
6688@code{.short} is normally the same as @samp{.word}.
6689@xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6690
6691In some configurations, however, @code{.short} and @code{.word} generate
6692numbers of different lengths. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6693@end ifset
6694@ifclear GENERIC
6695@ifset W16
6696@code{.short} is the same as @samp{.word}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6697@end ifset
6698@ifset W32
6699This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
6700a 16 bit number for each.
6701@end ifset
6702@end ifclear
6703
6704@node Single
6705@section @code{.single @var{flonums}}
6706
6707@cindex @code{single} directive
6708@cindex floating point numbers (single)
6709This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
6710has the same effect as @code{.float}.
6711@ifset GENERIC
6712The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
6713@command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6714@end ifset
6715@ifclear GENERIC
6716@ifset IEEEFLOAT
6717On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.single} emits 32-bit floating point
6718numbers in @sc{ieee} format.
6719@end ifset
6720@end ifclear
6721
6722@ifset COFF-ELF
6723@node Size
6724@section @code{.size}
6725
6726This directive is used to set the size associated with a symbol.
6727
6728@ifset COFF
6729@ifset ELF
6730@c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6731@subheading COFF Version
6732@end ifset
6733
6734@cindex @code{size} directive (COFF version)
6735For COFF targets, the @code{.size} directive is only permitted inside
6736@code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
6737
6738@smallexample
6739.size @var{expression}
6740@end smallexample
6741
6742@ifset BOUT
6743@samp{.size} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
6744@command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6745ignores it.
6746@end ifset
6747@end ifset
6748
6749@ifset ELF
6750@ifset COFF
6751@c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6752@subheading ELF Version
6753@end ifset
6754
6755@cindex @code{size} directive (ELF version)
6756For ELF targets, the @code{.size} directive is used like this:
6757
6758@smallexample
6759.size @var{name} , @var{expression}
6760@end smallexample
6761
6762This directive sets the size associated with a symbol @var{name}.
6763The size in bytes is computed from @var{expression} which can make use of label
6764arithmetic. This directive is typically used to set the size of function
6765symbols.
6766@end ifset
6767@end ifset
6768
6769@ifclear no-space-dir
6770@node Skip
6771@section @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6772
6773@cindex @code{skip} directive
6774@cindex filling memory
6775This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6776@var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma and
6777@var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same as
6778@samp{.space}.
6779@end ifclear
6780
6781@node Sleb128
6782@section @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
6783
6784@cindex @code{sleb128} directive
6785@var{sleb128} stands for ``signed little endian base 128.'' This is a
6786compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6787symbolic debugging format. @xref{Uleb128, ,@code{.uleb128}}.
6788
6789@ifclear no-space-dir
6790@node Space
6791@section @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6792
6793@cindex @code{space} directive
6794@cindex filling memory
6795This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6796@var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma
6797and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same
6798as @samp{.skip}.
6799
6800@ifset HPPA
6801@quotation
6802@emph{Warning:} @code{.space} has a completely different meaning for HPPA
6803targets; use @code{.block} as a substitute. See @cite{HP9000 Series 800
6804Assembly Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) for the meaning of the
6805@code{.space} directive. @xref{HPPA Directives,,HPPA Assembler Directives},
6806for a summary.
6807@end quotation
6808@end ifset
6809@end ifclear
6810
6811@ifset have-stabs
6812@node Stab
6813@section @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
6814
6815@cindex symbolic debuggers, information for
6816@cindex @code{stab@var{x}} directives
6817There are three directives that begin @samp{.stab}.
6818All emit symbols (@pxref{Symbols}), for use by symbolic debuggers.
6819The symbols are not entered in the @command{@value{AS}} hash table: they
6820cannot be referenced elsewhere in the source file.
6821Up to five fields are required:
6822
6823@table @var
6824@item string
6825This is the symbol's name. It may contain any character except
6826@samp{\000}, so is more general than ordinary symbol names. Some
6827debuggers used to code arbitrarily complex structures into symbol names
6828using this field.
6829
6830@item type
6831An absolute expression. The symbol's type is set to the low 8 bits of
6832this expression. Any bit pattern is permitted, but @code{@value{LD}}
6833and debuggers choke on silly bit patterns.
6834
6835@item other
6836An absolute expression. The symbol's ``other'' attribute is set to the
6837low 8 bits of this expression.
6838
6839@item desc
6840An absolute expression. The symbol's descriptor is set to the low 16
6841bits of this expression.
6842
6843@item value
6844An absolute expression which becomes the symbol's value.
6845@end table
6846
6847If a warning is detected while reading a @code{.stabd}, @code{.stabn},
6848or @code{.stabs} statement, the symbol has probably already been created;
6849you get a half-formed symbol in your object file. This is
6850compatible with earlier assemblers!
6851
6852@table @code
6853@cindex @code{stabd} directive
6854@item .stabd @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc}
6855
6856The ``name'' of the symbol generated is not even an empty string.
6857It is a null pointer, for compatibility. Older assemblers used a
6858null pointer so they didn't waste space in object files with empty
6859strings.
6860
6861The symbol's value is set to the location counter,
6862relocatably. When your program is linked, the value of this symbol
6863is the address of the location counter when the @code{.stabd} was
6864assembled.
6865
6866@cindex @code{stabn} directive
6867@item .stabn @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6868The name of the symbol is set to the empty string @code{""}.
6869
6870@cindex @code{stabs} directive
6871@item .stabs @var{string} , @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6872All five fields are specified.
6873@end table
6874@end ifset
6875@c end have-stabs
6876
6877@node String
6878@section @code{.string} "@var{str}", @code{.string8} "@var{str}", @code{.string16}
6879"@var{str}", @code{.string32} "@var{str}", @code{.string64} "@var{str}"
6880
6881@cindex string, copying to object file
6882@cindex string8, copying to object file
6883@cindex string16, copying to object file
6884@cindex string32, copying to object file
6885@cindex string64, copying to object file
6886@cindex @code{string} directive
6887@cindex @code{string8} directive
6888@cindex @code{string16} directive
6889@cindex @code{string32} directive
6890@cindex @code{string64} directive
6891
6892Copy the characters in @var{str} to the object file. You may specify more than
6893one string to copy, separated by commas. Unless otherwise specified for a
6894particular machine, the assembler marks the end of each string with a 0 byte.
6895You can use any of the escape sequences described in @ref{Strings,,Strings}.
6896
6897The variants @code{string16}, @code{string32} and @code{string64} differ from
6898the @code{string} pseudo opcode in that each 8-bit character from @var{str} is
6899copied and expanded to 16, 32 or 64 bits respectively. The expanded characters
6900are stored in target endianness byte order.
6901
6902Example:
6903@smallexample
6904 .string32 "BYE"
6905expands to:
6906 .string "B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E\0\0\0" /* On little endian targets. */
6907 .string "\0\0\0B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E" /* On big endian targets. */
6908@end smallexample
6909
6910
6911@node Struct
6912@section @code{.struct @var{expression}}
6913
6914@cindex @code{struct} directive
6915Switch to the absolute section, and set the section offset to @var{expression},
6916which must be an absolute expression. You might use this as follows:
6917@smallexample
6918 .struct 0
6919field1:
6920 .struct field1 + 4
6921field2:
6922 .struct field2 + 4
6923field3:
6924@end smallexample
6925This would define the symbol @code{field1} to have the value 0, the symbol
6926@code{field2} to have the value 4, and the symbol @code{field3} to have the
6927value 8. Assembly would be left in the absolute section, and you would need to
6928use a @code{.section} directive of some sort to change to some other section
6929before further assembly.
6930
6931@ifset ELF
6932@node SubSection
6933@section @code{.subsection @var{name}}
6934
6935@cindex @code{subsection} directive
6936@cindex Section Stack
6937This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6938@code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}),
6939@code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6940(@pxref{Previous}).
6941
6942This directive replaces the current subsection with @code{name}. The current
6943section is not changed. The replaced subsection is put onto the section stack
6944in place of the then current top of stack subsection.
6945@end ifset
6946
6947@ifset ELF
6948@node Symver
6949@section @code{.symver}
6950@cindex @code{symver} directive
6951@cindex symbol versioning
6952@cindex versions of symbols
6953Use the @code{.symver} directive to bind symbols to specific version nodes
6954within a source file. This is only supported on ELF platforms, and is
6955typically used when assembling files to be linked into a shared library.
6956There are cases where it may make sense to use this in objects to be bound
6957into an application itself so as to override a versioned symbol from a
6958shared library.
6959
6960For ELF targets, the @code{.symver} directive can be used like this:
6961@smallexample
6962.symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@nodename}
6963@end smallexample
6964If the symbol @var{name} is defined within the file
6965being assembled, the @code{.symver} directive effectively creates a symbol
6966alias with the name @var{name2@@nodename}, and in fact the main reason that we
6967just don't try and create a regular alias is that the @var{@@} character isn't
6968permitted in symbol names. The @var{name2} part of the name is the actual name
6969of the symbol by which it will be externally referenced. The name @var{name}
6970itself is merely a name of convenience that is used so that it is possible to
6971have definitions for multiple versions of a function within a single source
6972file, and so that the compiler can unambiguously know which version of a
6973function is being mentioned. The @var{nodename} portion of the alias should be
6974the name of a node specified in the version script supplied to the linker when
6975building a shared library. If you are attempting to override a versioned
6976symbol from a shared library, then @var{nodename} should correspond to the
6977nodename of the symbol you are trying to override.
6978
6979If the symbol @var{name} is not defined within the file being assembled, all
6980references to @var{name} will be changed to @var{name2@@nodename}. If no
6981reference to @var{name} is made, @var{name2@@nodename} will be removed from the
6982symbol table.
6983
6984Another usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6985@smallexample
6986.symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@nodename}
6987@end smallexample
6988In this case, the symbol @var{name} must exist and be defined within
6989the file being assembled. It is similar to @var{name2@@nodename}. The
6990difference is @var{name2@@@@nodename} will also be used to resolve
6991references to @var{name2} by the linker.
6992
6993The third usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6994@smallexample
6995.symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@@@nodename}
6996@end smallexample
6997When @var{name} is not defined within the
6998file being assembled, it is treated as @var{name2@@nodename}. When
6999@var{name} is defined within the file being assembled, the symbol
7000name, @var{name}, will be changed to @var{name2@@@@nodename}.
7001@end ifset
7002
7003@ifset COFF
7004@node Tag
7005@section @code{.tag @var{structname}}
7006
7007@cindex COFF structure debugging
7008@cindex structure debugging, COFF
7009@cindex @code{tag} directive
7010This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
7011information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
7012@code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. Tags are used to link structure
7013definitions in the symbol table with instances of those structures.
7014@ifset BOUT
7015
7016@samp{.tag} is only used when generating COFF format output; when
7017@command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
7018ignores it.
7019@end ifset
7020@end ifset
7021
7022@node Text
7023@section @code{.text @var{subsection}}
7024
7025@cindex @code{text} directive
7026Tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the end of
7027the text subsection numbered @var{subsection}, which is an absolute
7028expression. If @var{subsection} is omitted, subsection number zero
7029is used.
7030
7031@node Title
7032@section @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
7033
7034@cindex @code{title} directive
7035@cindex listing control: title line
7036Use @var{heading} as the title (second line, immediately after the
7037source file name and pagenumber) when generating assembly listings.
7038
7039This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
7040it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
7041
7042@ifset COFF-ELF
7043@node Type
7044@section @code{.type}
7045
7046This directive is used to set the type of a symbol.
7047
7048@ifset COFF
7049@ifset ELF
7050@c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
7051@subheading COFF Version
7052@end ifset
7053
7054@cindex COFF symbol type
7055@cindex symbol type, COFF
7056@cindex @code{type} directive (COFF version)
7057For COFF targets, this directive is permitted only within
7058@code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
7059
7060@smallexample
7061.type @var{int}
7062@end smallexample
7063
7064This records the integer @var{int} as the type attribute of a symbol table
7065entry.
7066
7067@ifset BOUT
7068@samp{.type} is associated only with COFF format output; when
7069@command{@value{AS}} is configured for @code{b.out} output, it accepts this
7070directive but ignores it.
7071@end ifset
7072@end ifset
7073
7074@ifset ELF
7075@ifset COFF
7076@c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
7077@subheading ELF Version
7078@end ifset
7079
7080@cindex ELF symbol type
7081@cindex symbol type, ELF
7082@cindex @code{type} directive (ELF version)
7083For ELF targets, the @code{.type} directive is used like this:
7084
7085@smallexample
7086.type @var{name} , @var{type description}
7087@end smallexample
7088
7089This sets the type of symbol @var{name} to be either a
7090function symbol or an object symbol. There are five different syntaxes
7091supported for the @var{type description} field, in order to provide
7092compatibility with various other assemblers.
7093
7094Because some of the characters used in these syntaxes (such as @samp{@@} and
7095@samp{#}) are comment characters for some architectures, some of the syntaxes
7096below do not work on all architectures. The first variant will be accepted by
7097the GNU assembler on all architectures so that variant should be used for
7098maximum portability, if you do not need to assemble your code with other
7099assemblers.
7100
7101The syntaxes supported are:
7102
7103@smallexample
7104 .type <name> STT_<TYPE_IN_UPPER_CASE>
7105 .type <name>,#<type>
7106 .type <name>,@@<type>
7107 .type <name>,%<type>
7108 .type <name>,"<type>"
7109@end smallexample
7110
7111The types supported are:
7112
7113@table @gcctabopt
7114@item STT_FUNC
7115@itemx function
7116Mark the symbol as being a function name.
7117
7118@item STT_GNU_IFUNC
7119@itemx gnu_indirect_function
7120Mark the symbol as an indirect function when evaluated during reloc
7121processing. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU systems).
7122
7123@item STT_OBJECT
7124@itemx object
7125Mark the symbol as being a data object.
7126
7127@item STT_TLS
7128@itemx tls_object
7129Mark the symbol as being a thead-local data object.
7130
7131@item STT_COMMON
7132@itemx common
7133Mark the symbol as being a common data object.
7134
7135@item STT_NOTYPE
7136@itemx notype
7137Does not mark the symbol in any way. It is supported just for completeness.
7138
7139@item gnu_unique_object
7140Marks the symbol as being a globally unique data object. The dynamic linker
7141will make sure that in the entire process there is just one symbol with this
7142name and type in use. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU
7143systems).
7144
7145@end table
7146
7147Note: Some targets support extra types in addition to those listed above.
7148
7149@end ifset
7150@end ifset
7151
7152@node Uleb128
7153@section @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
7154
7155@cindex @code{uleb128} directive
7156@var{uleb128} stands for ``unsigned little endian base 128.'' This is a
7157compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
7158symbolic debugging format. @xref{Sleb128, ,@code{.sleb128}}.
7159
7160@ifset COFF
7161@node Val
7162@section @code{.val @var{addr}}
7163
7164@cindex @code{val} directive
7165@cindex COFF value attribute
7166@cindex value attribute, COFF
7167This directive, permitted only within @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs,
7168records the address @var{addr} as the value attribute of a symbol table
7169entry.
7170@ifset BOUT
7171
7172@samp{.val} is used only for COFF output; when @command{@value{AS}} is
7173configured for @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but ignores it.
7174@end ifset
7175@end ifset
7176
7177@ifset ELF
7178@node Version
7179@section @code{.version "@var{string}"}
7180
7181@cindex @code{version} directive
7182This directive creates a @code{.note} section and places into it an ELF
7183formatted note of type NT_VERSION. The note's name is set to @code{string}.
7184@end ifset
7185
7186@ifset ELF
7187@node VTableEntry
7188@section @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
7189
7190@cindex @code{vtable_entry} directive
7191This directive finds or creates a symbol @code{table} and creates a
7192@code{VTABLE_ENTRY} relocation for it with an addend of @code{offset}.
7193
7194@node VTableInherit
7195@section @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
7196
7197@cindex @code{vtable_inherit} directive
7198This directive finds the symbol @code{child} and finds or creates the symbol
7199@code{parent} and then creates a @code{VTABLE_INHERIT} relocation for the
7200parent whose addend is the value of the child symbol. As a special case the
7201parent name of @code{0} is treated as referring to the @code{*ABS*} section.
7202@end ifset
7203
7204@node Warning
7205@section @code{.warning "@var{string}"}
7206@cindex warning directive
7207Similar to the directive @code{.error}
7208(@pxref{Error,,@code{.error "@var{string}"}}), but just emits a warning.
7209
7210@node Weak
7211@section @code{.weak @var{names}}
7212
7213@cindex @code{weak} directive
7214This directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
7215@code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
7216
7217On COFF targets other than PE, weak symbols are a GNU extension. This
7218directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
7219@code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
7220
7221On the PE target, weak symbols are supported natively as weak aliases.
7222When a weak symbol is created that is not an alias, GAS creates an
7223alternate symbol to hold the default value.
7224
7225@node Weakref
7226@section @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{target}}
7227
7228@cindex @code{weakref} directive
7229This directive creates an alias to the target symbol that enables the symbol to
7230be referenced with weak-symbol semantics, but without actually making it weak.
7231If direct references or definitions of the symbol are present, then the symbol
7232will not be weak, but if all references to it are through weak references, the
7233symbol will be marked as weak in the symbol table.
7234
7235The effect is equivalent to moving all references to the alias to a separate
7236assembly source file, renaming the alias to the symbol in it, declaring the
7237symbol as weak there, and running a reloadable link to merge the object files
7238resulting from the assembly of the new source file and the old source file that
7239had the references to the alias removed.
7240
7241The alias itself never makes to the symbol table, and is entirely handled
7242within the assembler.
7243
7244@node Word
7245@section @code{.word @var{expressions}}
7246
7247@cindex @code{word} directive
7248This directive expects zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section,
7249separated by commas.
7250@ifclear GENERIC
7251@ifset W32
7252For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 32-bit number.
7253@end ifset
7254@ifset W16
7255For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 16-bit number.
7256@end ifset
7257@end ifclear
7258@ifset GENERIC
7259
7260The size of the number emitted, and its byte order,
7261depend on what target computer the assembly is for.
7262@end ifset
7263
7264@c on amd29k, i960, sparc the "special treatment to support compilers" doesn't
7265@c happen---32-bit addressability, period; no long/short jumps.
7266@ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
7267@cindex difference tables altered
7268@cindex altered difference tables
7269@quotation
7270@emph{Warning: Special Treatment to support Compilers}
7271@end quotation
7272
7273@ifset GENERIC
7274Machines with a 32-bit address space, but that do less than 32-bit
7275addressing, require the following special treatment. If the machine of
7276interest to you does 32-bit addressing (or doesn't require it;
7277@pxref{Machine Dependencies}), you can ignore this issue.
7278
7279@end ifset
7280In order to assemble compiler output into something that works,
7281@command{@value{AS}} occasionally does strange things to @samp{.word} directives.
7282Directives of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2} are often emitted by
7283compilers as part of jump tables. Therefore, when @command{@value{AS}} assembles a
7284directive of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2}, and the difference between
7285@code{sym1} and @code{sym2} does not fit in 16 bits, @command{@value{AS}}
7286creates a @dfn{secondary jump table}, immediately before the next label.
7287This secondary jump table is preceded by a short-jump to the
7288first byte after the secondary table. This short-jump prevents the flow
7289of control from accidentally falling into the new table. Inside the
7290table is a long-jump to @code{sym2}. The original @samp{.word}
7291contains @code{sym1} minus the address of the long-jump to
7292@code{sym2}.
7293
7294If there were several occurrences of @samp{.word sym1-sym2} before the
7295secondary jump table, all of them are adjusted. If there was a
7296@samp{.word sym3-sym4}, that also did not fit in sixteen bits, a
7297long-jump to @code{sym4} is included in the secondary jump table,
7298and the @code{.word} directives are adjusted to contain @code{sym3}
7299minus the address of the long-jump to @code{sym4}; and so on, for as many
7300entries in the original jump table as necessary.
7301
7302@ifset INTERNALS
7303@emph{This feature may be disabled by compiling @command{@value{AS}} with the
7304@samp{-DWORKING_DOT_WORD} option.} This feature is likely to confuse
7305assembly language programmers.
7306@end ifset
7307@end ifset
7308@c end DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
7309
7310@ifclear no-space-dir
7311@node Zero
7312@section @code{.zero @var{size}}
7313
7314@cindex @code{zero} directive
7315@cindex filling memory with zero bytes
7316This directive emits @var{size} 0-valued bytes. @var{size} must be an absolute
7317expression. This directive is actually an alias for the @samp{.skip} directive
7318so in can take an optional second argument of the value to store in the bytes
7319instead of zero. Using @samp{.zero} in this way would be confusing however.
7320@end ifclear
7321
7322@node Deprecated
7323@section Deprecated Directives
7324
7325@cindex deprecated directives
7326@cindex obsolescent directives
7327One day these directives won't work.
7328They are included for compatibility with older assemblers.
7329@table @t
7330@item .abort
7331@item .line
7332@end table
7333
7334@ifset ELF
7335@node Object Attributes
7336@chapter Object Attributes
7337@cindex object attributes
7338
7339@command{@value{AS}} assembles source files written for a specific architecture
7340into object files for that architecture. But not all object files are alike.
7341Many architectures support incompatible variations. For instance, floating
7342point arguments might be passed in floating point registers if the object file
7343requires hardware floating point support---or floating point arguments might be
7344passed in integer registers if the object file supports processors with no
7345hardware floating point unit. Or, if two objects are built for different
7346generations of the same architecture, the combination may require the
7347newer generation at run-time.
7348
7349This information is useful during and after linking. At link time,
7350@command{@value{LD}} can warn about incompatible object files. After link
7351time, tools like @command{gdb} can use it to process the linked file
7352correctly.
7353
7354Compatibility information is recorded as a series of object attributes. Each
7355attribute has a @dfn{vendor}, @dfn{tag}, and @dfn{value}. The vendor is a
7356string, and indicates who sets the meaning of the tag. The tag is an integer,
7357and indicates what property the attribute describes. The value may be a string
7358or an integer, and indicates how the property affects this object. Missing
7359attributes are the same as attributes with a zero value or empty string value.
7360
7361Object attributes were developed as part of the ABI for the ARM Architecture.
7362The file format is documented in @cite{ELF for the ARM Architecture}.
7363
7364@menu
7365* GNU Object Attributes:: @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
7366* Defining New Object Attributes:: Defining New Object Attributes
7367@end menu
7368
7369@node GNU Object Attributes
7370@section @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
7371
7372The @code{.gnu_attribute} directive records an object attribute
7373with vendor @samp{gnu}.
7374
7375Except for @samp{Tag_compatibility}, which has both an integer and a string for
7376its value, @sc{gnu} attributes have a string value if the tag number is odd and
7377an integer value if the tag number is even. The second bit (@code{@var{tag} &
73782} is set for architecture-independent attributes and clear for
7379architecture-dependent ones.
7380
7381@subsection Common @sc{gnu} attributes
7382
7383These attributes are valid on all architectures.
7384
7385@table @r
7386@item Tag_compatibility (32)
7387The compatibility attribute takes an integer flag value and a vendor name. If
7388the flag value is 0, the file is compatible with other toolchains. If it is 1,
7389then the file is only compatible with the named toolchain. If it is greater
7390than 1, the file can only be processed by other toolchains under some private
7391arrangement indicated by the flag value and the vendor name.
7392@end table
7393
7394@subsection MIPS Attributes
7395
7396@table @r
7397@item Tag_GNU_MIPS_ABI_FP (4)
7398The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7399
7400@itemize @bullet
7401@item
74020 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7403@item
74041 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a standard
7405double-precision FPU.
7406@item
74072 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a single-precision FPU.
7408@item
74093 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7410@item
74114 for files using the deprecated hardware floating-point ABI which used 64-bit
7412floating-point registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and increased the
7413number of callee-saved floating-point registers.
7414@item
74155 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a double-precision FPU
7416with either 32-bit or 64-bit floating-point registers and 32-bit
7417general-purpose registers.
7418@item
74196 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point
7420registers and 32-bit general-purpose registers.
7421@item
74227 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point
7423registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and a rule that forbids the
7424direct use of odd-numbered single-precision floating-point registers.
7425@end itemize
7426@end table
7427
7428@subsection PowerPC Attributes
7429
7430@table @r
7431@item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_FP (4)
7432The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7433
7434@itemize @bullet
7435@item
74360 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7437@item
74381 for files using double-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7439@item
74402 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7441@item
74423 for files using single-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7443@end itemize
7444
7445@item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_Vector (8)
7446The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7447
7448@itemize @bullet
7449@item
74500 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
7451@item
74521 for files using general purpose registers to pass vectors.
7453@item
74542 for files using AltiVec registers to pass vectors.
7455@item
74563 for files using SPE registers to pass vectors.
7457@end itemize
7458@end table
7459
7460@subsection IBM z Systems Attributes
7461
7462@table @r
7463@item Tag_GNU_S390_ABI_Vector (8)
7464The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7465
7466@itemize @bullet
7467@item
74680 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
7469@item
74701 for files using software vector ABI.
7471@item
74722 for files using hardware vector ABI.
7473@end itemize
7474@end table
7475
7476@node Defining New Object Attributes
7477@section Defining New Object Attributes
7478
7479If you want to define a new @sc{gnu} object attribute, here are the places you
7480will need to modify. New attributes should be discussed on the @samp{binutils}
7481mailing list.
7482
7483@itemize @bullet
7484@item
7485This manual, which is the official register of attributes.
7486@item
7487The header for your architecture @file{include/elf}, to define the tag.
7488@item
7489The @file{bfd} support file for your architecture, to merge the attribute
7490and issue any appropriate link warnings.
7491@item
7492Test cases in @file{ld/testsuite} for merging and link warnings.
7493@item
7494@file{binutils/readelf.c} to display your attribute.
7495@item
7496GCC, if you want the compiler to mark the attribute automatically.
7497@end itemize
7498
7499@end ifset
7500
7501@ifset GENERIC
7502@node Machine Dependencies
7503@chapter Machine Dependent Features
7504
7505@cindex machine dependencies
7506The machine instruction sets are (almost by definition) different on
7507each machine where @command{@value{AS}} runs. Floating point representations
7508vary as well, and @command{@value{AS}} often supports a few additional
7509directives or command-line options for compatibility with other
7510assemblers on a particular platform. Finally, some versions of
7511@command{@value{AS}} support special pseudo-instructions for branch
7512optimization.
7513
7514This chapter discusses most of these differences, though it does not
7515include details on any machine's instruction set. For details on that
7516subject, see the hardware manufacturer's manual.
7517
7518@menu
7519@ifset AARCH64
7520* AArch64-Dependent:: AArch64 Dependent Features
7521@end ifset
7522@ifset ALPHA
7523* Alpha-Dependent:: Alpha Dependent Features
7524@end ifset
7525@ifset ARC
7526* ARC-Dependent:: ARC Dependent Features
7527@end ifset
7528@ifset ARM
7529* ARM-Dependent:: ARM Dependent Features
7530@end ifset
7531@ifset AVR
7532* AVR-Dependent:: AVR Dependent Features
7533@end ifset
7534@ifset Blackfin
7535* Blackfin-Dependent:: Blackfin Dependent Features
7536@end ifset
7537@ifset CR16
7538* CR16-Dependent:: CR16 Dependent Features
7539@end ifset
7540@ifset CRIS
7541* CRIS-Dependent:: CRIS Dependent Features
7542@end ifset
7543@ifset D10V
7544* D10V-Dependent:: D10V Dependent Features
7545@end ifset
7546@ifset D30V
7547* D30V-Dependent:: D30V Dependent Features
7548@end ifset
7549@ifset EPIPHANY
7550* Epiphany-Dependent:: EPIPHANY Dependent Features
7551@end ifset
7552@ifset H8/300
7553* H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7554@end ifset
7555@ifset HPPA
7556* HPPA-Dependent:: HPPA Dependent Features
7557@end ifset
7558@ifset I370
7559* ESA/390-Dependent:: IBM ESA/390 Dependent Features
7560@end ifset
7561@ifset I80386
7562* i386-Dependent:: Intel 80386 and AMD x86-64 Dependent Features
7563@end ifset
7564@ifset I860
7565* i860-Dependent:: Intel 80860 Dependent Features
7566@end ifset
7567@ifset I960
7568* i960-Dependent:: Intel 80960 Dependent Features
7569@end ifset
7570@ifset IA64
7571* IA-64-Dependent:: Intel IA-64 Dependent Features
7572@end ifset
7573@ifset IP2K
7574* IP2K-Dependent:: IP2K Dependent Features
7575@end ifset
7576@ifset LM32
7577* LM32-Dependent:: LM32 Dependent Features
7578@end ifset
7579@ifset M32C
7580* M32C-Dependent:: M32C Dependent Features
7581@end ifset
7582@ifset M32R
7583* M32R-Dependent:: M32R Dependent Features
7584@end ifset
7585@ifset M680X0
7586* M68K-Dependent:: M680x0 Dependent Features
7587@end ifset
7588@ifset M68HC11
7589* M68HC11-Dependent:: M68HC11 and 68HC12 Dependent Features
7590@end ifset
7591@ifset METAG
7592* Meta-Dependent :: Meta Dependent Features
7593@end ifset
7594@ifset MICROBLAZE
7595* MicroBlaze-Dependent:: MICROBLAZE Dependent Features
7596@end ifset
7597@ifset MIPS
7598* MIPS-Dependent:: MIPS Dependent Features
7599@end ifset
7600@ifset MMIX
7601* MMIX-Dependent:: MMIX Dependent Features
7602@end ifset
7603@ifset MSP430
7604* MSP430-Dependent:: MSP430 Dependent Features
7605@end ifset
7606@ifset NDS32
7607* NDS32-Dependent:: Andes NDS32 Dependent Features
7608@end ifset
7609@ifset NIOSII
7610* NiosII-Dependent:: Altera Nios II Dependent Features
7611@end ifset
7612@ifset NS32K
7613* NS32K-Dependent:: NS32K Dependent Features
7614@end ifset
7615@ifset PDP11
7616* PDP-11-Dependent:: PDP-11 Dependent Features
7617@end ifset
7618@ifset PJ
7619* PJ-Dependent:: picoJava Dependent Features
7620@end ifset
7621@ifset PPC
7622* PPC-Dependent:: PowerPC Dependent Features
7623@end ifset
7624@ifset PRU
7625* PRU-Dependent:: PRU Dependent Features
7626@end ifset
7627@ifset RL78
7628* RL78-Dependent:: RL78 Dependent Features
7629@end ifset
7630@ifset RISCV
7631* RISC-V-Dependent:: RISC-V Dependent Features
7632@end ifset
7633@ifset RX
7634* RX-Dependent:: RX Dependent Features
7635@end ifset
7636@ifset S390
7637* S/390-Dependent:: IBM S/390 Dependent Features
7638@end ifset
7639@ifset SCORE
7640* SCORE-Dependent:: SCORE Dependent Features
7641@end ifset
7642@ifset SH
7643* SH-Dependent:: Renesas / SuperH SH Dependent Features
7644* SH64-Dependent:: SuperH SH64 Dependent Features
7645@end ifset
7646@ifset SPARC
7647* Sparc-Dependent:: SPARC Dependent Features
7648@end ifset
7649@ifset TIC54X
7650* TIC54X-Dependent:: TI TMS320C54x Dependent Features
7651@end ifset
7652@ifset TIC6X
7653* TIC6X-Dependent :: TI TMS320C6x Dependent Features
7654@end ifset
7655@ifset TILEGX
7656* TILE-Gx-Dependent :: Tilera TILE-Gx Dependent Features
7657@end ifset
7658@ifset TILEPRO
7659* TILEPro-Dependent :: Tilera TILEPro Dependent Features
7660@end ifset
7661@ifset V850
7662* V850-Dependent:: V850 Dependent Features
7663@end ifset
7664@ifset VAX
7665* Vax-Dependent:: VAX Dependent Features
7666@end ifset
7667@ifset VISIUM
7668* Visium-Dependent:: Visium Dependent Features
7669@end ifset
7670@ifset XGATE
7671* XGATE-Dependent:: XGATE Features
7672@end ifset
7673@ifset XSTORMY16
7674* XSTORMY16-Dependent:: XStormy16 Dependent Features
7675@end ifset
7676@ifset XTENSA
7677* Xtensa-Dependent:: Xtensa Dependent Features
7678@end ifset
7679@ifset Z80
7680* Z80-Dependent:: Z80 Dependent Features
7681@end ifset
7682@ifset Z8000
7683* Z8000-Dependent:: Z8000 Dependent Features
7684@end ifset
7685@end menu
7686
7687@lowersections
7688@end ifset
7689
7690@c The following major nodes are *sections* in the GENERIC version, *chapters*
7691@c in single-cpu versions. This is mainly achieved by @lowersections. There is a
7692@c peculiarity: to preserve cross-references, there must be a node called
7693@c "Machine Dependencies". Hence the conditional nodenames in each
7694@c major node below. Node defaulting in makeinfo requires adjacency of
7695@c node and sectioning commands; hence the repetition of @chapter BLAH
7696@c in both conditional blocks.
7697
7698@ifset AARCH64
7699@include c-aarch64.texi
7700@end ifset
7701
7702@ifset ALPHA
7703@include c-alpha.texi
7704@end ifset
7705
7706@ifset ARC
7707@include c-arc.texi
7708@end ifset
7709
7710@ifset ARM
7711@include c-arm.texi
7712@end ifset
7713
7714@ifset AVR
7715@include c-avr.texi
7716@end ifset
7717
7718@ifset Blackfin
7719@include c-bfin.texi
7720@end ifset
7721
7722@ifset CR16
7723@include c-cr16.texi
7724@end ifset
7725
7726@ifset CRIS
7727@include c-cris.texi
7728@end ifset
7729
7730@ifset Renesas-all
7731@ifclear GENERIC
7732@node Machine Dependencies
7733@chapter Machine Dependent Features
7734
7735The machine instruction sets are different on each Renesas chip family,
7736and there are also some syntax differences among the families. This
7737chapter describes the specific @command{@value{AS}} features for each
7738family.
7739
7740@menu
7741* H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7742* SH-Dependent:: Renesas SH Dependent Features
7743@end menu
7744@lowersections
7745@end ifclear
7746@end ifset
7747
7748@ifset D10V
7749@include c-d10v.texi
7750@end ifset
7751
7752@ifset D30V
7753@include c-d30v.texi
7754@end ifset
7755
7756@ifset EPIPHANY
7757@include c-epiphany.texi
7758@end ifset
7759
7760@ifset H8/300
7761@include c-h8300.texi
7762@end ifset
7763
7764@ifset HPPA
7765@include c-hppa.texi
7766@end ifset
7767
7768@ifset I370
7769@include c-i370.texi
7770@end ifset
7771
7772@ifset I80386
7773@include c-i386.texi
7774@end ifset
7775
7776@ifset I860
7777@include c-i860.texi
7778@end ifset
7779
7780@ifset I960
7781@include c-i960.texi
7782@end ifset
7783
7784@ifset IA64
7785@include c-ia64.texi
7786@end ifset
7787
7788@ifset IP2K
7789@include c-ip2k.texi
7790@end ifset
7791
7792@ifset LM32
7793@include c-lm32.texi
7794@end ifset
7795
7796@ifset M32C
7797@include c-m32c.texi
7798@end ifset
7799
7800@ifset M32R
7801@include c-m32r.texi
7802@end ifset
7803
7804@ifset M680X0
7805@include c-m68k.texi
7806@end ifset
7807
7808@ifset M68HC11
7809@include c-m68hc11.texi
7810@end ifset
7811
7812@ifset METAG
7813@include c-metag.texi
7814@end ifset
7815
7816@ifset MICROBLAZE
7817@include c-microblaze.texi
7818@end ifset
7819
7820@ifset MIPS
7821@include c-mips.texi
7822@end ifset
7823
7824@ifset MMIX
7825@include c-mmix.texi
7826@end ifset
7827
7828@ifset MSP430
7829@include c-msp430.texi
7830@end ifset
7831
7832@ifset NDS32
7833@include c-nds32.texi
7834@end ifset
7835
7836@ifset NIOSII
7837@include c-nios2.texi
7838@end ifset
7839
7840@ifset NS32K
7841@include c-ns32k.texi
7842@end ifset
7843
7844@ifset PDP11
7845@include c-pdp11.texi
7846@end ifset
7847
7848@ifset PJ
7849@include c-pj.texi
7850@end ifset
7851
7852@ifset PPC
7853@include c-ppc.texi
7854@end ifset
7855
7856@ifset PRU
7857@include c-pru.texi
7858@end ifset
7859
7860@ifset RL78
7861@include c-rl78.texi
7862@end ifset
7863
7864@ifset RISCV
7865@include c-riscv.texi
7866@end ifset
7867
7868@ifset RX
7869@include c-rx.texi
7870@end ifset
7871
7872@ifset S390
7873@include c-s390.texi
7874@end ifset
7875
7876@ifset SCORE
7877@include c-score.texi
7878@end ifset
7879
7880@ifset SH
7881@include c-sh.texi
7882@include c-sh64.texi
7883@end ifset
7884
7885@ifset SPARC
7886@include c-sparc.texi
7887@end ifset
7888
7889@ifset TIC54X
7890@include c-tic54x.texi
7891@end ifset
7892
7893@ifset TIC6X
7894@include c-tic6x.texi
7895@end ifset
7896
7897@ifset TILEGX
7898@include c-tilegx.texi
7899@end ifset
7900
7901@ifset TILEPRO
7902@include c-tilepro.texi
7903@end ifset
7904
7905@ifset V850
7906@include c-v850.texi
7907@end ifset
7908
7909@ifset VAX
7910@include c-vax.texi
7911@end ifset
7912
7913@ifset VISIUM
7914@include c-visium.texi
7915@end ifset
7916
7917@ifset XGATE
7918@include c-xgate.texi
7919@end ifset
7920
7921@ifset XSTORMY16
7922@include c-xstormy16.texi
7923@end ifset
7924
7925@ifset XTENSA
7926@include c-xtensa.texi
7927@end ifset
7928
7929@ifset Z80
7930@include c-z80.texi
7931@end ifset
7932
7933@ifset Z8000
7934@include c-z8k.texi
7935@end ifset
7936
7937@ifset GENERIC
7938@c reverse effect of @down at top of generic Machine-Dep chapter
7939@raisesections
7940@end ifset
7941
7942@node Reporting Bugs
7943@chapter Reporting Bugs
7944@cindex bugs in assembler
7945@cindex reporting bugs in assembler
7946
7947Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{@value{AS}} reliable.
7948
7949Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or it may
7950not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is to help the
7951entire community by making the next version of @command{@value{AS}} work better.
7952Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of @command{@value{AS}}.
7953
7954In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7955information that enables us to fix the bug.
7956
7957@menu
7958* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7959* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7960@end menu
7961
7962@node Bug Criteria
7963@section Have You Found a Bug?
7964@cindex bug criteria
7965
7966If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7967
7968@itemize @bullet
7969@cindex fatal signal
7970@cindex assembler crash
7971@cindex crash of assembler
7972@item
7973If the assembler gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
7974@command{@value{AS}} bug. Reliable assemblers never crash.
7975
7976@cindex error on valid input
7977@item
7978If @command{@value{AS}} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
7979
7980@cindex invalid input
7981@item
7982If @command{@value{AS}} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
7983is a bug. However, you should note that your idea of ``invalid input'' might
7984be our idea of ``an extension'' or ``support for traditional practice''.
7985
7986@item
7987If you are an experienced user of assemblers, your suggestions for improvement
7988of @command{@value{AS}} are welcome in any case.
7989@end itemize
7990
7991@node Bug Reporting
7992@section How to Report Bugs
7993@cindex bug reports
7994@cindex assembler bugs, reporting
7995
7996A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu} products. If
7997you obtained @command{@value{AS}} from a support organization, we recommend you
7998contact that organization first.
7999
8000You can find contact information for many support companies and
8001individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8002distribution.
8003
8004@ifset BUGURL
8005In any event, we also recommend that you send bug reports for @command{@value{AS}}
8006to @value{BUGURL}.
8007@end ifset
8008
8009The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8010@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8011fact or leave it out, state it!
8012
8013Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the problem
8014and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might assume that the
8015name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter. Well, probably it does
8016not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps the bug is a stray memory reference which
8017happens to fetch from the location where that name is stored in memory;
8018perhaps, if the name were different, the contents of that location would fool
8019the assembler into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and
8020give a specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
8021and the most helpful.
8022
8023Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix the bug if
8024it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports on the assumption
8025that the bug has not been reported previously.
8026
8027Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
8028bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8029respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8030You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
8031
8032To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8033
8034@itemize @bullet
8035@item
8036The version of @command{@value{AS}}. @command{@value{AS}} announces it if you start
8037it with the @samp{--version} argument.
8038
8039Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
8040the bug in the current version of @command{@value{AS}}.
8041
8042@item
8043Any patches you may have applied to the @command{@value{AS}} source.
8044
8045@item
8046The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8047version number.
8048
8049@item
8050What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{@value{AS}}---e.g.
8051``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8052
8053@item
8054The command arguments you gave the assembler to assemble your example and
8055observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important, list them
8056all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is sufficient.
8057
8058If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8059and then we might not encounter the bug.
8060
8061@item
8062A complete input file that will reproduce the bug. If the bug is observed when
8063the assembler is invoked via a compiler, send the assembler source, not the
8064high level language source. Most compilers will produce the assembler source
8065when run with the @samp{-S} option. If you are using @code{@value{GCC}}, use
8066the options @samp{-v --save-temps}; this will save the assembler source in a
8067file with an extension of @file{.s}, and also show you exactly how
8068@command{@value{AS}} is being run.
8069
8070@item
8071A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8072incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8073
8074Of course, if the bug is that @command{@value{AS}} gets a fatal signal, then we
8075will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might not
8076notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us a chance to
8077make a mistake.
8078
8079Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still say so
8080explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your copy of
8081@command{@value{AS}} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the C
8082library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash and ours
8083would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours fails to crash, we
8084would know that the bug was not happening for us. If you had not told us to
8085expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our
8086observations.
8087
8088@item
8089If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{@value{AS}} source, send us context
8090diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or @samp{-p}
8091option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file. If you even
8092discuss something in the @command{@value{AS}} source, refer to it by context, not
8093by line number.
8094
8095The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8096sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8097@end itemize
8098
8099Here are some things that are not necessary:
8100
8101@itemize @bullet
8102@item
8103A description of the envelope of the bug.
8104
8105Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8106which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8107changes will not affect it.
8108
8109This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8110will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8111with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8112We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8113
8114Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8115of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8116output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8117less time, and so on.
8118
8119However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8120report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8121
8122@item
8123A patch for the bug.
8124
8125A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8126the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8127a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8128to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8129
8130Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{@value{AS}} it is very hard to
8131construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path through
8132the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be able to construct
8133one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is fixed.
8134
8135And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8136patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8137help us to understand.
8138
8139@item
8140A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8141
8142Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8143things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8144@end itemize
8145
8146@node Acknowledgements
8147@chapter Acknowledgements
8148
8149If you have contributed to GAS and your name isn't listed here,
8150it is not meant as a slight. We just don't know about it. Send mail to the
8151maintainer, and we'll correct the situation. Currently
8152@c (October 2012),
8153the maintainer is Nick Clifton (email address @code{nickc@@redhat.com}).
8154
8155Dean Elsner wrote the original @sc{gnu} assembler for the VAX.@footnote{Any
8156more details?}
8157
8158Jay Fenlason maintained GAS for a while, adding support for GDB-specific debug
8159information and the 68k series machines, most of the preprocessing pass, and
8160extensive changes in @file{messages.c}, @file{input-file.c}, @file{write.c}.
8161
8162K. Richard Pixley maintained GAS for a while, adding various enhancements and
8163many bug fixes, including merging support for several processors, breaking GAS
8164up to handle multiple object file format back ends (including heavy rewrite,
8165testing, an integration of the coff and b.out back ends), adding configuration
8166including heavy testing and verification of cross assemblers and file splits
8167and renaming, converted GAS to strictly ANSI C including full prototypes, added
8168support for m680[34]0 and cpu32, did considerable work on i960 including a COFF
8169port (including considerable amounts of reverse engineering), a SPARC opcode
8170file rewrite, DECstation, rs6000, and hp300hpux host ports, updated ``know''
8171assertions and made them work, much other reorganization, cleanup, and lint.
8172
8173Ken Raeburn wrote the high-level BFD interface code to replace most of the code
8174in format-specific I/O modules.
8175
8176The original VMS support was contributed by David L. Kashtan. Eric Youngdale
8177has done much work with it since.
8178
8179The Intel 80386 machine description was written by Eliot Dresselhaus.
8180
8181Minh Tran-Le at IntelliCorp contributed some AIX 386 support.
8182
8183The Motorola 88k machine description was contributed by Devon Bowen of Buffalo
8184University and Torbjorn Granlund of the Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
8185
8186Keith Knowles at the Open Software Foundation wrote the original MIPS back end
8187(@file{tc-mips.c}, @file{tc-mips.h}), and contributed Rose format support
8188(which hasn't been merged in yet). Ralph Campbell worked with the MIPS code to
8189support a.out format.
8190
8191Support for the Zilog Z8k and Renesas H8/300 processors (tc-z8k,
8192tc-h8300), and IEEE 695 object file format (obj-ieee), was written by
8193Steve Chamberlain of Cygnus Support. Steve also modified the COFF back end to
8194use BFD for some low-level operations, for use with the H8/300 and AMD 29k
8195targets.
8196
8197John Gilmore built the AMD 29000 support, added @code{.include} support, and
8198simplified the configuration of which versions accept which directives. He
8199updated the 68k machine description so that Motorola's opcodes always produced
8200fixed-size instructions (e.g., @code{jsr}), while synthetic instructions
8201remained shrinkable (@code{jbsr}). John fixed many bugs, including true tested
8202cross-compilation support, and one bug in relaxation that took a week and
8203required the proverbial one-bit fix.
8204
8205Ian Lance Taylor of Cygnus Support merged the Motorola and MIT syntax for the
820668k, completed support for some COFF targets (68k, i386 SVR3, and SCO Unix),
8207added support for MIPS ECOFF and ELF targets, wrote the initial RS/6000 and
8208PowerPC assembler, and made a few other minor patches.
8209
8210Steve Chamberlain made GAS able to generate listings.
8211
8212Hewlett-Packard contributed support for the HP9000/300.
8213
8214Jeff Law wrote GAS and BFD support for the native HPPA object format (SOM)
8215along with a fairly extensive HPPA testsuite (for both SOM and ELF object
8216formats). This work was supported by both the Center for Software Science at
8217the University of Utah and Cygnus Support.
8218
8219Support for ELF format files has been worked on by Mark Eichin of Cygnus
8220Support (original, incomplete implementation for SPARC), Pete Hoogenboom and
8221Jeff Law at the University of Utah (HPPA mainly), Michael Meissner of the Open
8222Software Foundation (i386 mainly), and Ken Raeburn of Cygnus Support (sparc,
8223and some initial 64-bit support).
8224
8225Linas Vepstas added GAS support for the ESA/390 ``IBM 370'' architecture.
8226
8227Richard Henderson rewrote the Alpha assembler. Klaus Kaempf wrote GAS and BFD
8228support for openVMS/Alpha.
8229
8230Timothy Wall, Michael Hayes, and Greg Smart contributed to the various tic*
8231flavors.
8232
8233David Heine, Sterling Augustine, Bob Wilson and John Ruttenberg from Tensilica,
8234Inc.@: added support for Xtensa processors.
8235
8236Several engineers at Cygnus Support have also provided many small bug fixes and
8237configuration enhancements.
8238
8239Jon Beniston added support for the Lattice Mico32 architecture.
8240
8241Many others have contributed large or small bugfixes and enhancements. If
8242you have contributed significant work and are not mentioned on this list, and
8243want to be, let us know. Some of the history has been lost; we are not
8244intentionally leaving anyone out.
8245
8246@node GNU Free Documentation License
8247@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8248@include fdl.texi
8249
8250@node AS Index
8251@unnumbered AS Index
8252
8253@printindex cp
8254
8255@bye
8256@c Local Variables:
8257@c fill-column: 79
8258@c End:
This page took 0.045195 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.